616365
7
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/308
Pagina verder
Owner's Manual
XC90
WEB EDITION
WELCOME TO THE WORLD-WIDE FAMILY OF VOLVO OWNERS.
We trust that you will enjoy many years of safe
driving in your Volvo, an automobile designed
with your safety and comfort in mind. We encour-
age you to familiarize yourself with the equipment
descriptions and operating instructions in this
manual.
We also urge you and your passengers to wear
seat belts at all times in this (or any other) vehicle.
And, of course, please do not operate a vehicle if
you may be affected by alcohol, medication or
any impairment that could hinder your ability to
drive.
Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable fed-
eral safety and emission standards. If you have
any questions regarding your vehicle, please con-
tact your Volvo retailer or see the section "Con-
tacting Volvo" in this manual's "Introduction"
chapter for information on getting in touch with
Volvo in the United States and Canada.
Contents
2
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
00
00 Introduction
Important information................................. 8
Environment.............................................. 13
Important warnings................................... 14
01
01 Safety
Occupant safety........................................ 18
Reporting safety defects........................... 19
Seat belts.................................................. 20
Supplemental Restraint System............... 23
Front airbags............................................. 24
Occupant Weight Sensor.......................... 28
Side impact protection airbags................. 32
Inflatable Curtain....................................... 34
Whiplash Protection System..................... 36
Child safety............................................... 38
Child restraint systems............................. 41
Infant seats............................................... 43
Convertible seats...................................... 45
Booster cushions...................................... 48
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors.................. 49
Top tether anchors.................................... 51
Integrated booster cushion....................... 52
02
02 Instruments and controls
Instrument overview.................................. 56
Instrument panel....................................... 58
Information display................................... 62
Center console buttons............................ 64
Steering wheel adjustment....................... 66
Lighting panel........................................... 67
Manually unlocking the fuel filler door...... 70
Left-side steering wheel lever................... 71
Right-side steering wheel lever................. 72
Hazard warning flashers........................... 75
Trip computer........................................... 76
Cruise control............................................ 78
12-volt sockets......................................... 80
Hood/tailgate............................................ 81
Power windows......................................... 82
Mirrors....................................................... 84
Power moonroof....................................... 87
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System*...... 89
Contents
3
03
03 Climate
Climate control system – general infor-
mation....................................................... 94
Air distribution........................................... 96
Electronic climate control (ECC)............... 98
04
04 Interior
Front seats.............................................. 104
Rear seats............................................... 108
Interior lighting........................................ 111
Storage compartments........................... 114
Securing cargo........................................ 119
05
05 Locks and alarm
Remote keys and key blades.................. 126
Locking and unlocking............................ 130
Child safety locks.................................... 132
Alarm....................................................... 133
Contents
4
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06
06 Starting and driving
General information................................ 138
Fuel requirements................................... 139
Refueling................................................. 141
Starting the vehicle................................. 143
Ignition switch and steering wheel lock.. 145
Economical driving.................................. 146
Difficult driving conditions...................... 147
Automatic transmission.......................... 149
Jump starting.......................................... 152
All Wheel Drive*....................................... 153
Brake system.......................................... 154
Parking brake.......................................... 157
Stability system....................................... 158
Front/rear park assist*............................. 160
Towing.................................................... 162
Towing a trailer....................................... 164
Detachable trailer hitch........................... 167
Load carriers (accessory)........................ 168
Cold weather precautions....................... 169
Before a long distance trip...................... 170
Blind Spot Information System*.............. 171
07
07 Wheels and tires
General information................................ 178
Tire inflation ............................................ 181
Tire inflation pressure table..................... 183
Tire designations..................................... 184
Glossary of tire terminology.................... 186
Vehicle loading........................................ 187
Uniform Tire Quality Grading.................. 189
Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires.. 190
Temporary spare..................................... 191
Tire Sealing System ............................... 192
Changing wheels.................................... 198
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 203
08
08 Car care
Washing and cleaning the vehicle.......... 208
Paint touch up......................................... 213
Contents
5
09
09 Maintenance and servicing
Volvo service........................................... 216
Maintaining your vehicle......................... 217
Working on your vehicle......................... 219
Engine compartment............................... 221
Engine oil................................................ 222
Fluids...................................................... 224
Wiper blades........................................... 226
Battery..................................................... 227
Replacing bulbs...................................... 230
Fuses...................................................... 238
10
10 Audio
Audio system overview........................... 252
Audio system controls............................ 253
Radio functions....................................... 258
SiriusXM satellite radio........................ 263
Auxiliary equipment................................ 267
CD player/changer.................................. 270
Menu structure........................................ 273
Bluetooth
®
hands-free connection......... 274
11
11 Specifications
Label information.................................... 282
Dimensions ............................................ 284
Weights .................................................. 286
Fluids...................................................... 288
Suspension............................................. 289
Engine oil................................................ 290
Engine specifications.............................. 291
Electrical system..................................... 292
Three-way catalytic converter................. 293
Overview of information and warning
symbols .................................................. 294
Volvo programs....................................... 296
Contents
6
12
12 Index
Index....................................................... 298
Contents
7
Introduction
Important information
8
Contacting Volvo
In the USA:
Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
Customer Care Center
1 Volvo Drive,
P.O. Box 914
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647
1-800-458-1552
www.volvocars.com/us
In Canada:
Volvo Cars of Canada
National Customer Service
9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
1-800-663-8255
www.volvocars.com/ca
About this manual
Before you operate your vehicle for the
first time, please familiarize yourself with
the information found in the chapters
"Instruments and controls" and "Starting
and driving."
Information contained in the balance of
the manual is extremely useful and should
be read after operating the vehicle for the
first time.
The manual is structured so that it can be
used for reference. For this reason, it
should be kept in the vehicle for ready
access.
Footnotes
Certain pages of this manual contain informa-
tion in the form of footnotes at the bottom of
the page. This information supplements the
text that the footnote number refers to (a let-
ter is used if the footnote refers to text in a
table).
Display texts
There are several displays in the driver’s field
of vision that show messages generated by
various systems and functions in the vehicle.
These texts are indicated in the Owner’s
Manual by being in slightly larger type than
the surrounding text and are printed in gray,
(for example:
Change doors unlock
setting).
Decals
There are various types of decals in the vehi-
cle whose purpose is to provide important
information in a clear and concise way. The
importance of these decals is explained as
follows, in descending order of importance.
Risk of injury
G031590
Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning back-
ground, white text/image on a black back-
ground. Decals of this type are used to indi-
cate potential danger. Ignoring a warning of
this type could result in serious injury or
death.
Introduction
Important information
9
Risk of damage to the vehicle
G031592
White ISO symbols and white text/image on a
black or blue warning background and space
for a message. If the information on decals of
this type is ignored, damage to the vehicle
could result.
Information
G031593
White ISO symbols and white text/image on a
black background. These decals provide gen-
eral information.
NOTE
The decals shown in the Owner’s Manual
are examples only and are not intended to
be reproductions of the decals actually
used in the vehicle. The purpose is to give
an indication of how they look and their
approximate location in the vehicle. The
applicable information for your particular
vehicle can be found on the respective
decals in the vehicle.
Types of lists used in the manual
Procedures
Procedures (step-by-step instructions), or
actions that must be carried out in a certain
order, are arranged in numbered lists in this
manual.
If there is a series of illustrations associ-
ated with step-by-step instructions, each
step in the procedure is numbered in the
same way as the corresponding illustra-
tion.
Lists in which letters are used can be
found with series of illustrations in cases
where the order in which the instructions
are carried out is not important.
Arrows with or without numbers are used
to indicate the direction of a movement.
Arrows containing letters are used to indi-
cate movement.
If there are no illustrations associated with a
step-by-step list, the steps in the procedure
are indicated by ordinary numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used
in general overview illustrations in which
certain components are pointed out. The
corresponding number is also used in the
position list's description of the various
components.
Introduction
Important information
10
Bullet lists
Bullets are used to differentiate a number of
components/functions/points of information
that can be listed in random order.
For example:
Coolant
Engine oil
Continued
} }This symbol can be found at the lower
right corner of an odd-numbered (right-hand)
page to indicate that the current topic is con-
tinued on the following page.
Options and accessories
Optional or accessory equipment described
in this manual is indicated by an asterisk.
Optional or accessory equipment may not be
available in all countries or markets. Please
note that some vehicles may be equipped dif-
ferently, depending on special legal require-
ments.
Contact your Volvo retailer for additional
information.
NOTE
All information, illustrations and speci-
fications contained in this manual are
based on the latest product informa-
tion available at the time of publica-
tion.
Volvo reserves the right to make model
changes at any time, or to change
specifications or design without notice
and without incurring obligation.
Do not export your Volvo to another
country before investigating that coun-
try's applicable safety and emission
control requirements. In some cases it
may be difficult or impossible to com-
ply with these requirements. Modifica-
tions to the emission control system(s)
may render your Volvo not certifiable
for legal operation in the U.S., Canada
and other countries.
WARNING
If your vehicle is involved in an accident,
unseen damage may affect its drivability
and safety.
WARNING
CALIFORNIA proposition 65
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain or
emit chemicals known to the state of Cali-
fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects
or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear con-
tain or emit chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer, and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
WARNING
Certain components of this vehicle such as
air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners,
adaptive steering columns, and button cell
batteries may contain Perchlorate material.
Special handling may apply for service or
vehicle end of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
Introduction
Important information
11
Shiftlock
When your vehicle is parked, the gear selec-
tor is locked in the P (Park) position. To
release the selector from this position, turn
the ignition key to position II (or start the
engine), depress the brake pedal, press the
button on the front side of the gear selector
and move the selector from P (Park).
Keylock
When you switch off the ignition, the gear
selector must be in the P (Park) position
before the key can be removed from the igni-
tion switch.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
The ABS system in your vehicle performs a
self-diagnostic test when the vehicle first rea-
ches the speed of approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate sev-
eral times and a sound may be audible from
the ABS control module. This is normal.
Fuel filler door
Press the button on the light switch panel
(see the illustration on page 67) when the
vehicle is at a standstill to unlock the fuel filler
door. Please note that the fuel filler door will
remain unlocked until the vehicle begins to
move forward. An audible click will be heard
when the fuel filler door relocks.
Points to keep in mind
Do not export your Volvo to another
country before investigating that coun-
try's applicable safety and exhaust emis-
sion requirements. In some cases it may
be difficult or impossible to comply with
these requirements. Modifications to the
emission control system(s) may render
your Volvo not certifiable for legal opera-
tion in the U.S., Canada and other coun-
tries.
All information, illustrations and specifica-
tions contained in this manual are based
on the latest product information availa-
ble at the time of publication. Please note
that some vehicles may be equipped dif-
ferently, depending on special legal
requirements. Optional equipment descri-
bed in this manual may not be available in
all markets.
Some of the illustrations shown are
generic and may not depict the exact
model for which this manual is intended.
Volvo reserves the right to make model
changes at any time, or to change speci-
fications or design without notice and
without incurring obligation.
Volvo Structural Parts Statement
Volvo has always been and continues to be a
leader in automotive safety. Volvo engineers
and manufactures vehicles designed to help
protect vehicle occupants in the event of a
collision.
Volvos are designed to absorb the impact of
a collision. This energy absorption system
including, but not limited to, structural com-
ponents such as bumper reinforcement bars,
bumper energy absorbers, frames, rails,
fender aprons, A-pillars, B-pillars and body
panels must work together to maintain cabin
integrity and protect the vehicle occupants.
The supplemental restraint system including
but not limited to air bags, side curtain air
bags, and deployment sensors work together
with the above components to provide proper
timing for air bag deployment.
Due to the above, Volvo Cars of North Amer-
ica does not support the use of aftermarket,
alternative or anything other than original
Volvo parts for collision repair.
In addition Volvo does not support the use or
re-use of structural components from an
existing vehicle that has been previously
damaged. Although these parts may appear
equivalent, it is difficult to tell if the parts have
been previously replaced with non-OE parts
or if the part has been damaged as a result of
Introduction
Important information
12
a prior collision. The quality of these used
parts may also have been affected due to
environmental exposure.
Information on the Internet
Additional information about your vehicle is
available at www.volvocars.com.
In order to read a QR code, a QR reader is
necessary, which is available as an app for a
number of different cell phones and can be
downloaded from the App Store or Google
Play.
QR code
Open Source Software Notice
This product uses certain free / open source
and other software originating from third
parties, that is subject to the GNU General
Public License version 2 and 3 (GPLv2/
GPLv3), GNU Lesser General Public License
version 3 (LGPLv3), The FreeType Project
License (“FreeType License”) and other
different and/or additional copyright licenses,
disclaimers and notices. The links how to
access the exact terms of GPLv2, GPLv3,
LGPLv3, and the other open source software
licenses, disclaimers, acknowledgements and
notices are provided to you below. Please
refer to the exact terms of the relevant
License, regarding your rights under said
licenses. Volvo Car Corporation (VCC) offers
to provide the source code of said free/open
source software to you for a charge covering
the cost of performing such distribution, such
as the cost of media, shipping and handling,
upon written request. Please contact your
nearest Volvo retailer.
This offer is valid for a period of at least three
(3) years from the date of the distribution of
this product by VCC / or for as long as VCC
offers spare parts or customer support.
Portions of this product uses software
copyrighted © v2.4.3/2010 The
FreeTypeProject (www.freetype.org). All rights
reserved.
This product includes software under
following licenses:
GPL v2 : http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-
licenses/gpl-2.0.html
Linux kernel (merge between MontaVista
2.6.31 kernel and kernel from
L2.6.31_MX51_ER_1007 BSP)
uBoot (based on v2009.08)
busybox (based on version 1.13.2.)
GCC runtime library exception: http://
www.gnu.org/licenses/gcc-exception.html
libgcc_s.so.1
LGPL v3: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/
lgpl.html
Libc.so.6, libpthread.so.0, Librt.so.1
The FreeType Project License: http://
www.freetype.org/FTL.TXT
libfreetype.so.6 (version 2.4.3)
Introduction
Environment
13
Volvo and the environment
Volvo is committed to the well being of its
customers. As a natural part of this commit-
ment, we care about the environment in
which we all live. Caring for the environment
means an everyday involvement in reducing
our environmental impact. Volvo's environ-
mental activities are based on a holistic view,
which means we consider the overall environ-
mental impact of a product throughout its
complete life cycle. In this context, design,
production, product use, and recycling are all
important considerations. In production,
Volvo has partly or completely phased out
several chemicals including CFCs, lead chro-
mates, asbestos, and cadmium; and reduced
the number of chemicals used in our
plants 50% since 1991.
Volvo was the first in the world to introduce
into production a three-way catalytic con-
verter with a Lambda sond, now called the
heated oxygen sensor, in 1976. The current
version of this highly efficient system reduces
emissions of harmful substances (CO, HC,
NOx) from the exhaust pipe by approximately
95 – 99% and the search to eliminate the
remaining emissions continues. Volvo is the
only automobile manufacturer to offer CFC-
free retrofit kits for the air conditioning system
of all models as far back as the 1975
model 240. Advanced electronic engine con-
trols and cleaner fuels are bringing us closer
to our goal. In addition to continuous environ-
mental refinement of conventional gasoline-
powered internal combustion engines, Volvo
is actively looking at advanced technology
alternative-fuel vehicles.
When you drive a Volvo, you become our
partner in the work to lessen the car's impact
on the environment. To reduce your vehicle's
environmental impact, you can:
Maintain proper air pressure in your tires.
Tests have shown decreased fuel econ-
omy with improperly inflated tires.
Follow the recommended maintenance
schedule in your Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet.
Drive at a constant speed whenever pos-
sible.
See a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician as soon as possible for
inspection if the check engine (malfunc-
tion indicator) light illuminates, or stays
on after the vehicle has started.
Properly dispose of any vehicle-related
waste such as used motor oil, used bat-
teries, brake pads, etc.
When cleaning your vehicle, please use
genuine Volvo car care products. All
Volvo car care products are formulated to
be environmentally friendly.
FSC
®
The FSC
®
(Forest Stewardship Council
®
)
symbol indicates that the wood pulp used in
this publication comes from FSC
®
certified
forests and other responsible sources.
Introduction
Important warnings
14
Driver distraction
A driver has a responsibility to do everything
possible to ensure his or her own safety and
the safety of passengers in the vehicle and
others sharing the roadway. Avoiding distrac-
tions is part of that responsibility.
Driver distraction results from driver activities
that are not directly related to controlling the
vehicle in the driving environment. Your new
Volvo is, or can be, equipped with many fea-
ture-rich entertainment and communication
systems. These include hands-free cellular
telephones, navigation systems, and multi-
purpose audio systems. You may also own
other portable electronic devices for your own
convenience. When used properly and safely,
they enrich the driving experience. Improperly
used, any of these could cause a distraction.
For all of these systems, we want to provide
the following warning that reflects the strong
Volvo concern for your safety. Never use
these devices or any feature of your vehicle in
a way that distracts you from the task of driv-
ing safely. Distraction can lead to a serious
accident. In addition to this general warning,
we offer the following guidance regarding
specific newer features that may be found in
your vehicle:
Never use a hand-held cellular telephone
while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit
cellular telephone use by a driver while
the vehicle is moving.
If your vehicle is equipped with a naviga-
tion system, set and make changes to
your travel itinerary only with the vehicle
parked.
Never program your audio system while
the vehicle is moving. Program radio pre-
sets with the vehicle parked, and use
your programmed presets to make radio
use quicker and simpler.
Never use portable computers or per-
sonal digital assistants while the vehicle is
moving.
Accessory installation
We strongly recommend that Volvo own-
ers install only genuine, Volvo-approved
accessories, and that accessory installa-
tions be performed only by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to
ensure compatibility with the perform-
ance, safety, and emission systems in
your vehicle. Additionally, a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician knows
where accessories may and may not be
safely installed in your Volvo. In all cases,
please consult a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician before installing
any accessory in or on your vehicle.
Accessories that have not been approved
by Volvo may or may not be specifically
tested for compatibility with your vehicle.
Additionally, an inexperienced installer
may not be familiar with some of your
car's systems.
Any of your car's performance and safety
systems could be adversely affected if
you install accessories that Volvo has not
tested, or if you allow accessories to be
installed by someone unfamiliar with your
vehicle.
Damage caused by unapproved or
improperly installed accessories may not
be covered by your new vehicle warranty.
See your Warranty and Service Records
Information booklet for more warranty
information. Volvo assumes no responsi-
bility for death, injury, or expenses that
may result from the installation of non-
genuine accessories.
Introduction
15
16
Occupant safety...................................................................................... 18
Reporting safety defects......................................................................... 19
Seat belts................................................................................................ 20
Supplemental Restraint System.............................................................. 23
Front airbags........................................................................................... 24
Occupant Weight Sensor........................................................................ 28
Side impact protection airbags............................................................... 32
Inflatable Curtain..................................................................................... 34
Whiplash Protection System................................................................... 36
Child safety............................................................................................. 38
Child restraint systems........................................................................... 41
Infant seats.............................................................................................. 43
Convertible seats.................................................................................... 45
Booster cushions.................................................................................... 48
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors................................................................. 49
Top tether anchors.................................................................................. 51
Integrated booster cushion..................................................................... 52
S A F E T Y
01 Safety
Occupant safety
01
18
Volvo's concern for safety
Safety is the Volvo cornerstone. Our concern
dates back to 1927 when the first Volvo rolled
off the production line. Three-point seat belts
(a Volvo invention), safety cages, and energy-
absorbing impact zones were designed into
Volvo vehicles long before it was fashionable
or required by government regulation. We will
not compromise our commitment to safety.
We continue to seek out new safety features
and to refine those already in our vehicles.
You can help. We would appreciate hearing
your suggestions about improving automobile
safety. We also want to know if you ever have
a safety concern with your vehicle. Call us in
the U.S. at: 800-458-1552 or in Canada at:
800-663-8255.
Occupant safety reminders
How safely you drive doesn't depend on how
old you are but rather on:
How well you see.
Your ability to concentrate.
How quickly you make decisions under
stress to avoid an accident.
The tips listed below are suggestions to help
you cope with the ever changing traffic envi-
ronment.
Never drink and drive.
If you are taking any medication, consult
your physician about its potential effects
on your driving abilities.
Take a driver-retraining course.
Have your eyes checked regularly.
Keep your windshield and headlights
clean.
Replace wiper blades when they start to
leave streaks.
Take into account the traffic, road, and
weather conditions, particularly with
regard to stopping distance.
Never send text messages while driving.
Refrain from using or minimize the use of
a cell phone while driving.
Recall information
Information regarding recalls or other service
campaigns is available on our website at
www.volvocars.com/us/. Select the tab
YOUR VOLVO and the heading RECALL
INFORMATION will be displayed at the lower
left side of the screen. Enter your Vehicle
Identification Number for your vehicle (found
at the base of the windshield). If your vehicle
has any open Recalls, they will be displayed
on this page.
Volvo customers in Canada
For any questions regarding open recalls for
your vehicle, please contact your authorized
Volvo retailer. If your retailer is unable to
answer your questions, please contact Volvo
Customer Relations at 905 695-9626, Mon-
day through Friday, 8:30 A.M. to 5:00 P.M.
EST or by e-mail at vclcust@volvocars.com.
You may also write us at:
Volvo Cars of Canada
National Customer Service
9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
01 Safety
Reporting safety defects
01
19
Reporting safety defects in the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying Volvo Cars of North
America, LLC. If NHTSA receives
similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individ-
ual problems between you, your
retailer, or Volvo Cars of North
America, LLC. To contact NHTSA,
you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans-
portation, Washington D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other informa-
tion about motor vehicle safety from:
http://www.safercar.gov
Volvo strongly recommends that if
your vehicle is covered under a
service campaign, safety or emis-
sion recall or similar action, it should
be completed as soon as possible.
Please check with your local retailer
or Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
if your vehicle is covered under
these conditions.
NHTSA can be reached at:
Internet:
http://www.nhtsa.gov
Telephone:
1-888-DASH-2-DOT
(1-888-327-4236).
Reporting safety defects in Canada
If you believe your vehicle has a defect that
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform Trans-
port Canada in addition to notifying Volvo
Cars of Canada Corp.
Transport Canada can be contacted at:
1-800-333-0510
Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500
Fax: 1-819-994-3372
Mailing Address: Transport Canada - Road
Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z
0A1
01 Safety
Seat belts
01
20
Using seat belts
G020104
Adjusting the seat belt
Volvo, the inventor of the three-point seat
belt, urges you and all occupants of your
vehicle to wear seat belts and ensure that
children are properly restrained, using an
infant, car, or booster seat determined by
age, weight and height.
Volvo also believes no child should sit in the
front seat of a vehicle.
Most states and provinces make it mandatory
for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts.
Seat belt pretensioners
The seat belts are equipped with pretension-
ers that reduce slack in the belts. These pre-
tensioners are triggered in situations where
the airbags deploy. The front seat belts also
include a tension reducing device which, in
the event of a collision, limits the peak forces
exerted by the seat belt on the occupant.
Buckling a seat belt
Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latch
plate into the receptacle until a distinct click
is heard. The seat belt retractor is normally
"unlocked" and you can move freely, provi-
ded that the shoulder belt is not pulled out
too far.
The seat belt retractor will lock up in the
following situations:
if the belt is pulled out rapidly
during braking and acceleration
if the vehicle is leaning excessively
when driving in turns
if the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer-
gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) is
activated
NOTE
Each seat belt (except for the driver's belt)
is equipped with the ALR/ELR function,
which is designed to help keep the seat
belt taut. ALR/ELR activates if the seat belt
is pulled out as far as possible. If this is
done, a sound from the seat belt retractor
will be audible, which is normal, and the
seat belt will be pulled taut and locked in
place. This function is automatically disa-
bled when the seat belt is unbuckled and
fully retracted.
See also page 39 for information about
using a seat belt's ALR/ELR function to
anchor a child seat.
When wearing the seat belt remember:
The belt should not be twisted or turned.
The lap section of the belt must be posi-
tioned low on the hips (not pressing
against the abdomen).
Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled
up into its retractor and that the shoulder
and lap belts are taut.
Unbuckling the seat belt
To remove the seat belt, press the red section
on the seat belt receptacle. Before exiting the
vehicle, check that the seat belt retracts fully
after being unbuckled. If necessary, guide the
belt back into the retractor slot.
01 Safety
Seat belts
01
21
Seat belt reminder
The seat belt reminder consists of an audible
signal, an indicator light above the rearview
mirror, and a symbol in the instrument panel
that alert the driver and front seat passenger
if their seat belts are not fastened.
WARNING
Never use a seat belt for more than
one occupant.
Never wear the shoulder portion of the
belt under the arm, behind the back or
otherwise out of position. Such use
could cause injury in the event of an
accident.
Seat belts lose much of their strength
when exposed to violent stretching
and should be replaced after any colli-
sion, even if they appear to be undam-
aged.
Never repair the belt yourself; have this
work done by an authorized Volvo
service technician only.
Any device used to induce slack into
the shoulder belt portion of the three-
point belt system will have a detrimen-
tal effect on the amount of protection
available to you in the event of a colli-
sion.
The seat back should not be tilted too
far back. The shoulder belt must be
taut in order to function properly.
Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the
front passenger's seat. We also rec-
ommend that children who have out-
grown these devices sit in the rear
seat with the seat belt properly fas-
tened.
Seat belt use during pregnancy
G020105
The seat belt should always be worn during
pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in
the correct way. The diagonal section should
wrap over the shoulder then be routed
between the breasts and to the side of the
belly. The lap section should lay flat over the
thighs and as low as possible under the belly.
It must never be allowed to ride upward.
Remove all slack from the belt and insure that
it fits close to the body without any twists.
01 Safety
Seat belts
01
22
As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
should adjust their seats and steering wheel
such that they can easily maintain control of
the vehicle as they drive (which means they
must be able to easily operate the foot pedals
and steering wheel). Within this context, they
should strive to position the seat with as large
a distance as possible between their belly
and the steering wheel.
Child seats
Please see page 39 for information on
securing child seats with the seat belts.
Seat belt maintenance
Check periodically that the seat belts are in
good condition. Use water and a mild deter-
gent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism
function as follows: attach the seat belt and
pull rapidly on the strap.
01 Safety
Supplemental Restraint System
01
23
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
G027284
SRS warning light
As an enhancement to the three-point seat
belts, your Volvo is equipped with a Supple-
mental Restraint System (SRS). Volvo's SRS
consists of seat belt pretensioners, front air-
bags, side impact airbags, the occupant
weight sensor, and inflatable curtains. All of
these systems are monitored by the SRS
control module. An SRS warning light in the
instrument panel (see the illustration) illumi-
nates when the ignition key is turned to posi-
tion I, II, or III, and will normally go out after
approximately 7 seconds if no faults are
detected in the system.
Where applicable, a text message
will also be displayed when the
SRS warning light illuminates. If
this warning symbol is not func-
tioning properly, the general
warning symbol illuminates and a text mes-
sage will be displayed.
WARNING
If the SRS warning light stays on after
the engine has started or if it illumi-
nates while you are driving, have the
vehicle inspected by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician as
soon as possible.
Never try to repair any component or
part of the SRS yourself. Any interfer-
ence in the system could cause mal-
function and serious injury. All work on
these systems should be performed by
an authorized Volvo service technician.
WARNING
If your vehicle has been subjected to flood
conditions (e.g. soaked carpeting/standing
water on the floor of the vehicle) or if your
vehicle has become flood-damaged in any
way, do not attempt to start the vehicle or
put the key in the ignition before discon-
necting the battery (see below). This may
cause airbag deployment which could
result in personal injury. Have the vehicle
towed to a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician for repairs.
Automatic transmission:
Before attempting to tow the vehicle, use
the following procedure to override the
shiftlock system to move the gear selector
to the neutral position:
1. Switch off the ignition for at least
10 minutes and disconnect the bat-
tery.
2. Wait at least one minute.
3. Insert the key in the ignition and turn it
to position II
4. Press firmly on the brake pedal.
5. Move the gear selector from P (Park)
to the N (Neutral) position.
01 Safety
Front airbags
01
24
The front airbag system
G020111
The front airbags supplement the three-point
seat belts. For these airbags to provide the
protection intended, seat belts must be worn
at all times.
The front airbag system includes gas genera-
tors surrounded by the airbags, and decelera-
tion sensors that activate the gas generators,
causing the airbags to be inflated with nitro-
gen gas.
G031006
Location of the passenger's side front airbag
As the movement of the seats' occupants
compresses the airbags, some of the gas is
expelled at a controlled rate to provide better
cushioning. Both seat belt pretensioners also
deploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entire
process, including inflation and deflation of
the airbags, takes approximately one fifth of a
second.
The location of the front airbags is indicated
by SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering
wheel pad and above the glove compartment,
and by decals on both sun visors and on the
front and far right side of the dash.
The driver's side front airbag is folded
and located in the steering wheel hub.
The passenger's side front airbag is
folded behind a panel located above the
glove compartment.
WARNING
The airbags in the vehicle are designed
to be a SUPPLEMENT to–not a
replacement for–the three-point seat
belts. For maximum protection, wear
seat belts at all times. Be aware that
no system can prevent all possible
injuries that may occur in an accident.
Never drive a vehicle with your hands
on the steering wheel pad/airbag
housing.
The front airbags are designed to help
prevent serious injury. Deployment
occurs very quickly and with consider-
able force. During normal deployment
and depending on variables such as
seating position, one may experience
abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other
injuries as a result from deployment of
one or both of the airbags.
When installing any accessory equip-
ment, make sure that the front airbag
system is not damaged. Any interfer-
ence in the system could cause mal-
function.
01 Safety
Front airbags
01
25
Front airbag deployment
The front airbags are designed to deploy
during certain frontal or front-angular col-
lisions, impacts, or decelerations,
depending on the crash severity, angle,
speed and object impacted. The airbags
may also deploy in certain non-frontal
collisions where rapid deceleration
occurs.
The SRS sensors, which trigger the front
airbags, are designed to react to both the
impact of the collision and the inertial
forces generated by it, and to determine if
the intensity of the collision is sufficient
for the seat belt pretensioners and/or air-
bags to be deployed.
However, not all frontal collisions activate the
front airbags.
If the collision involves a nonrigid object
(e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid,
fixed object at a low speed, the front air-
bags will not necessarily deploy.
Front airbags do not normally deploy in a
side impact collision, in a collision from
the rear or in a rollover situation.
The amount of damage to the bodywork
does not reliably indicate if the airbags
should have deployed or not.
NOTE
Deployment of front airbags occurs
only one time during an accident. In a
collision where deployment occurs,
the airbags and seat belt pretensioners
activate. Some noise occurs and a
small amount of powder is released.
The release of the powder may appear
as smoke-like matter. This is a normal
characteristic and does not indicate
fire.
Volvo's front airbags use special sen-
sors that are integrated with the front
seat buckles. The point at which the
airbag deploys is determined by
whether or not the seat belt is being
used, as well as the severity of the col-
lision.
Collisions can occur where only one of
the airbags deploys. If the impact is
less severe, but severe enough to
present a clear injury risk, the airbags
are triggered at partial capacity. If the
impact is more severe, the airbags are
triggered at full capacity.
Should you have questions about any com-
ponent in the SRS system, please contact a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician
or Volvo customer support:
In the USA
Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
Customer Care Center
1 Volvo Drive
P.O. Box 914
Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647
1-800-458-1552
www.volvocars.us
In Canada
Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.
National Customer Service
9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
1-800-663-8255
www.volvocars.ca
01 Safety
Front airbags
01
26
WARNING
Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the
front passenger's seat. We also rec-
ommend that occupants under 4 feet
7 inches (140 cm) in height who have
outgrown these devices sit in the rear
seat with the seat belt fastened.
Never drive with the airbags deployed.
The fact that they hang out can impair
the steering of your vehicle. Other
safety systems can also be damaged.
The smoke and dust formed when the
airbags are deployed can cause skin
and eye irritation in the event of pro-
longed exposure.
G032934
Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors
Passenger's side airbag decal
WARNING
Children must never be allowed in the
front passenger's seat.
Occupants in the front passenger's
seat must never sit on the edge of the
seat, sit leaning toward the instrument
panel or otherwise sit out of position.
The occupant's back must be as
upright as comfort allows and be
against the seat back with the seat
belt properly fastened.
Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on
the dash, seat or out of the window.
01 Safety
Front airbags
01
27
WARNING
No objects or accessory equipment,
e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed
on, attached to, or installed near the
air bag hatch (the area above the glove
compartment) or the area affected by
airbag deployment.
There should be no loose articles, e.g.
coffee cups, on the floor, seat, or
dashboard area.
Never try to open the airbag cover on
the steering wheel or the passenger's
side dashboard. This should only be
done by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the vehicle occupants.
01 Safety
Occupant Weight Sensor
01
28
Disabling the passenger's side front
airbag
G027050
Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light
Volvo recommends that ALL occupants
(adults and children) shorter than 4 feet
7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the rear seat
of any vehicle with a passenger's side front
airbag, and be properly restrained. Children
should always be seated in child restraints
appropriate for their size and weight. For
child safety recommendations, see
page 38.
The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is
designed to meet the regulatory requirements
of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
(FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (will
not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag
under certain conditions.
The OWS works with sensors that are part of
the front passenger's seat and seat belt. The
sensors are designed to detect the presence
of a properly seated occupant and determine
if the passenger's side front airbag should be
enabled (may inflate) or disabled (will not
inflate).
The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the pas-
senger's side front airbag when:
the front passenger's seat is unoccupied,
or has small/medium objects in the front
seat,
the system determines that an infant is
present in a rear-facing infant seat that is
installed according to the manufacturer's
instructions,
the system determines that a small child
is present in a forward-facing child
restraint that is installed according to the
manufacturer's instructions,
the system determines that a small child
is present in a booster seat,
a front passenger takes his/her weight off
of the seat for a period of time,
a child or a small person occupies the
front passenger's seat.
The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay
on to remind you that the passenger's side
front airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is located in the
overhead console, near the base of the rear-
view mirror.
NOTE
The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp will illuminate for a short period of
time when the ignition is turned on to con-
firm it is functional. When the front pas-
senger's seat is not occupied (empty seat)
or in the event that the passenger's side
front airbag is enabled (may inflate), the
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
will be off.
However, if a fault is detected in the sys-
tem:
The OWS indicator light will stay on
The SRS warning light (see page 23) will
come on and stay on
The message PASS. AIRBAG OFF
SERVICE URGENT will be displayed in
the information display.
01 Safety
Occupant Weight Sensor
01
29
WARNING
If a fault in the system is detected and
indicated as explained, be aware that
the passenger's side front airbag will
not deploy in the event of a collision.
In this case, the safety systems and
Occupant Weight Sensor should be
inspected by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician as soon as
possible.
WARNING
Never try to open, remove, or repair
any components in the OWS system.
This could result in system malfunc-
tion. Maintenance or repairs should
only be carried out by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
The front passenger's seat should not
be modified in any way. This could
reduce pressure on the seat cushion,
which might interfere with the OWS
system's function.
The OWS is designed to disable (will not
inflate) the passenger's side front airbag
when a rear facing infant seat, a forward-fac-
ing child restraint, or a booster seat is
detected. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp will illuminate and stay on to
remind you that the passenger's side front
airbag is disabled (see the following table).
Passeng-
er's seat
occu-
pancy
status
OWS
indicator
light sta-
tus
Passeng-
er's side
front air-
bag status
Seat unoc-
cupied
OWS indi-
cator light
is not
lit
Passenger's
side front air-
bag disabled
Seat occu-
pied by low
weight
occupant/
object
A
OWS indi-
cator light
lights
up
Passenger's
side front air-
bag disabled
Seat occu-
pied by
heavy occu-
pant/object
OWS indi-
cator light
is not
lit
Passenger's
side front air-
bag enabled
A
Volvo recommends that children always be properly
restrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats.In
rare situations when the seat belt is not properly fastened,
some child restraints may not be detected by the OWS
because there is very little weight on the vehicle seat cush-
ion. In these cases the passenger's side front airbag may
be disabled, but the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp will not be lit. Do not assume that the passenger's
side front airbag is disabled unless the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed (turn the vehicle off, remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer's instructions)
and that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is
on, or move the child restraint to the rear seat.
The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate)
the passenger's side front airbag in the event
of a collision anytime the system senses that
a person of adult size is sitting properly in the
front passenger's seat. The PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will be off and
remain off.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger's seat, but the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possi-
ble that the person isn't sitting properly in the
seat. If this happens:
1. Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seat back in an upright position.
2. Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person's legs comfortably extended.
3. Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and enable the pas-
senger's frontal airbag.
4. If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica-
tor lamp remains on even after this, the
01 Safety
Occupant Weight Sensor
01
30
person should be advised to ride in the
rear seat.
This condition reflects limitations of the OWS
classification capability. It does not indicate
OWS malfunction.
Modifications
If you are considering modifying your vehicle
in any way to accommodate a disability, for
example by altering or adapting the driver's
or front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag
systems, please contact Volvo at:
In the USA
Volvo Cars of North America, LLC
Customer Care Center
1 Volvo Drive
P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh,
New Jersey 07647
1-800-458-1552
In Canada
Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.
National Customer Service
9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9
1-800-663-8255
WARNING
No objects that add to the total weight
on the seat should be placed on the
front passenger's seat. If a child is
seated in the front passenger's seat
with any additional weight, this extra
weight could cause the OWS system
to enable the airbag, which might
cause it to deploy in the event of a col-
lision, thereby injuring the child.
The seat belt should never be wrapped
around an object on the front pas-
senger's seat. This could interfere with
the OWS system's function.
The front passenger's seat belt should
never be used in a way that exerts
more pressure on the passenger than
normal. This could increase the pres-
sure exerted on the weight sensor by a
child, and could result in the airbag
being enabled, which might cause it to
deploy in the event of a collision,
thereby injuring the child.
WARNING
Keep the following points in mind with
respect to the OWS system. Failure to fol-
low these instructions could adversely
affect the system's function and result in
serious injury to the occupant of the front
passenger's seat:
The full weight of the front seat pas-
senger should always be on the seat
cushion. The passenger should never
lift him/herself off the seat cushion
using the armrest in the door or the
center console, by pressing the feet on
the floor, by sitting on the edge of the
seat cushion, or by pressing against
the backrest in a way that reduces
pressure on the seat cushion. This
could cause OWS to disable the front
passenger's side airbag.
Do not place any type of object on the
front passenger's seat in such a way
that jamming, pressing, or squeezing
occurs between the object and the
front seat, other than as a direct result
of the correct use of the Automatic
Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking
Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat belt (see
page 39).
No objects should be placed under the
front passenger's seat. This could
01 Safety
Occupant Weight Sensor
01
31
interfere with the OWS system's func-
tion.
01 Safety
Side impact protection airbags
01
32
Side impact airbags – front seats only
G020118
Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbag
As an enhancement to the structural side
impact protection built into your vehicle, the
vehicle is also equipped with Side Impact
Protection System (SIPS) airbags.
The SIPS airbag system is designed to help
increase occupant protection in the event of
certain side impact collisions. The SIPS air-
bags are designed to deploy only during cer-
tain side-impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and point of
impact.
G025315
Driver's side SIPS airbag
G025316
Passenger's side SIPS airbag
NOTE
SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag)
occurs only on the side of the vehicle
affected by the impact. The airbags are not
designed to deploy in all side impact situa-
tions.
Components in the SIPS airbag system
This SIPS airbag system consists of gas gen-
erators and side airbag modules built into the
outboard sides of both front seat backrests.
01 Safety
Side impact protection airbags
01
33
WARNING
The SIPS airbag system is a supple-
ment to the structural Side Impact
Protection System and the three-point
seat belt system. It is not designed to
deploy during collisions from the front
or rear of the vehicle or in rollover sit-
uations.
The use of seat covers on the front
seats may impede SIPS airbag deploy-
ment.
No objects, accessory equipment or
stickers may be placed on, attached to
or installed near the SIPS airbag sys-
tem or in the area affected by SIPS air-
bag deployment.
Never try to open or repair any compo-
nents of the SIPS airbag system. This
should be done only by a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician.
In order for the SIPS airbag to provide
its best protection, both front seat
occupants should sit in an upright
position with the seat belt properly fas-
tened.
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in injury to the occupants of the
vehicle in the event of an accident.
01 Safety
Inflatable Curtain
01
34
The Inflatable Curtain (IC)
G027047
This system consists of inflatable curtains
located along the sides of the roof liners,
stretching from the front side windows to the
rear edge of the rear side windows. It is
designed to help protect the heads of the
occupants of the front seats and the occu-
pants of the outboard rear seating positions,
including the outboard passenger in the third
row of seats in certain side impact collisions.
G027048
The inflatable curtains in the Volvo XC90 are
also designed to help protect the occupants
of the vehicle in a roll-over situation, and to
help prevent them from being thrown from
the vehicle if a roll-over occurs.
NOTE
The Inflatable Curtains extend to protect
all three rows of seats.
By design, the IC system deploys only on the
side of the vehicle affected by the impact.
However, in certain side impacts, or in a roll-
over situation, BOTH the Inflatable Curtains
and the Side Impact Airbag System (SIPS-
bag) will deploy, whereas, in some cases,
ONLY the Inflatable Curtain will deploy. In
cases where BOTH the Inflatable Curtain and
the SIPS-bag deploy, deployment will occur
simultaneously.
NOTE
If the Inflatable Curtain deploys, it remains
inflated for approximately 5 seconds.
WARNING
The IC system is a supplement to the
Side Impact Protection System. It is
not designed to deploy during colli-
sions from the front or the rear of the
vehicle.
Never try to open or repair any compo-
nents of the IC system. This should be
done only by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
Never hang heavy items from the ceil-
ing handles. This could impede
deployment of the Inflatable curtain.
01 Safety
Inflatable Curtain
01
35
WARNING
In order for the IC to provide its best pro-
tection, both front seat occupants and
both outboard rear seat occupants should
sit in an upright position with the seat belt
properly fastened; adults using the seat
belt and children using the proper child
restraint system. Only adults should sit in
the front seats. Children must never be
allowed in the front passenger seat. See
page 39 for guidelines. Failure to follow
these instructions can result in injury to the
vehicle occupants in an accident.
01 Safety
Whiplash Protection System
01
36
Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) – front seats only
G020347
The Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS)
consists of specially designed hinges and
brackets on the front seat backrests designed
to help absorb some of the energy generated
in a collision from the rear (when the vehicle
is "rear-ended").
In the event of a collision of this type, the
hinges and brackets of the front seat back-
rests are designed to change position slightly
to allow the backrest/head restraint to help
support the occupant's head before moving
slightly rearward. This movement helps
absorb some of the forces that could result in
whiplash.
WARNING
The WHIPS system is designed to
supplement the other safety systems
in your vehicle. For this system to
function properly, the three-point seat
belt must be worn. Please be aware
that no system can prevent all possible
injuries that may occur in an accident.
The WHIPS system is designed to
function in certain collisions from the
rear, depending on the crash severity,
angle and speed.
WARNING
Occupants in the front seats must never sit
out of position. The occupant's back must
be as upright as comfort allows and be
against the seat back with the seat belt
properly fastened.
01 Safety
Whiplash Protection System
01
37
WARNING
If your vehicle has been involved in a
rear-end collision, the front seat back-
rests must be inspected by a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician,
even if the seats appear to be undam-
aged. Certain components in the
WHIPS system may need to be
replaced.
Do not attempt to service any compo-
nent in the WHIPS system yourself.
G020125
WARNING
Any contact between the front seat back-
rests and the folded rear seat could
impede the function of the WHIPS system.
If the rear seat is folded down, the occu-
pied front seats must be adjusted forward
so that they do not touch the folded rear
seat.
G020126
WARNING
Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behind
the front seats could impede the func-
tion of the WHIPS system.
If the rear seat backrests are folded
down, cargo must be secured to pre-
vent it from sliding forward against the
front seat backrests in the event of a
collision from the rear. This could
interfere with the action of the WHIPS
system.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
38
Children should be seated safely
Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint
systems for all occupants including children.
Remember that, regardless of age and size, a
child should always be properly restrained in
a vehicle.
Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/
LATCH attachments, which make it more
convenient to install child seats.
Some restraint systems for children are
designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap
belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.
Such child restraint systems can help protect
children in vehicles in the event of an acci-
dent only if they are used properly. However,
children could be endangered in a crash if the
child restraints are not properly secured in the
vehicle. Failure to follow the installation
instructions for your child restraint can result
in your child striking the vehicle's interior in a
sudden stop.
Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable
substitute for a child restraint system. In an
accident, a child held in a person's arms can
be crushed between the vehicle's interior and
an unrestrained person. The child could also
be injured by striking the interior, or by being
ejected from the vehicle during a sudden
maneuver or impact. The same can also hap-
pen if the infant or child rides unrestrained on
the seat. Other occupants should also be
properly restrained to help reduce the chance
of injuring or increasing the injury of a child.
All states and provinces have legislation gov-
erning how and where children should be car-
ried in a vehicle. Find out the regulations
existing in your state or province. Recent
accident statistics have shown that children
are safer in rear seating positions than front
seating positions when properly restrained. A
child restraint system can help protect a child
in a vehicle. Here's what to look for when
selecting a child restraint system:
It should have a label certifying that it
meets applicable Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards (FMVSS 213) – or in
Canada, CMVSS 213.
Make sure the child restraint system is
approved for the child's height, weight
and development – the label required by
the standard or regulation, or instructions
for infant restraints, typically provide this
information.
In using any child restraint system, we
urge you to carefully look over the
instructions that are provided with the
restraint. Be sure you understand them
and can use the device properly and
safely in this vehicle. A misused child
restraint system can result in increased
injuries for both the infant or child and
other occupants in the vehicle.
When a child has outgrown the child safety
seat, you should use the rear seat with the
standard seat belt fastened. The best way to
help protect the child here is to place the
child on a cushion so that the seat belt is
properly located on the hips, see page 48.
Legislation in your state or province may
mandate the use of a child seat or cushion in
combination with the seat belt, depending on
the child's age and/or size. Please check
local regulations.
A specially designed and tested booster
cushion and backrest can be obtained from
your Volvo retailer.
USA: for children weighing 33 – 80 lbs. (15 –
36 kg) and 38 – 54 inches (97 – 137 cm) in
height
Canada: for children weighing 40 – 80 lbs.
(18 – 36 kg) and 40 – 54 inches (102 –
137 cm) in height
01 Safety
Child safety
01
39
WARNING
Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the
front passenger's seat. We also rec-
ommend that children under 4 feet
7 inches (140 cm) in height who have
outgrown these devices sit in the rear
seat with the seat belt fastened.
On hot days, the temperature in the
vehicle interior can rise very quickly.
Exposure to these high temperatures
for even a short period of time can
cause heat-related injury or death.
Small children are particularly at risk.
Child seat should always be registered. See
page 40 for more information.
Automatic Locking Retractor/
Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/
ELR)
To make child seat installation easier, each
seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equip-
ped with a locking mechanism to help keep
the seat belt taut.
When attaching the seat belt to a child
seat:
1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat
according to the child seat manufactur-
er's instructions.
2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible.
3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the
buckle (lock) in the usual way.
4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut
around the child seat.
A sound from the seat belt retractor will be
audible at this time and is normal. The belt
will now be locked in place. This function is
automatically disabled when the seat belt is
unlocked and the belt is fully retracted.
WARNING
Do not use child safety seats or child
booster cushions/backrests in the front
passenger's seat. We also recommend
that children who have outgrown these
devices sit in the rear seat with the seat
belt properly fastened.
Volvo's recommendations
Why does Volvo believe that no child should
sit in the front seat of a car? It's quite simple
really. A front airbag is a very powerful device
designed, by law, to help protect an adult.
Because of the size of the airbag and its
speed of inflation, a child should never be
placed in the front seat, even if he or she is
properly belted or strapped into a child safety
seat. Volvo has been an innovator in safety
for over seventy-five years, and we'll continue
to do our part. But we need your help. Please
remember to put your children in the back
seat, and buckle them up.
Volvo has some very specific
recommendations:
Always wear your seat belt.
Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety
device which, when used with a three-
point seat belt can help reduce serious
injuries during certain types of accidents.
Volvo recommends that you do not dis-
connect the airbag system in your vehi-
cle.
Volvo strongly recommends that every-
one in the vehicle be properly restrained.
Volvo recommends that ALL occupants
(adults and children) shorter than 4 feet
7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back
01 Safety
Child safety
01
40
seat of any vehicle with a front passenger
side airbag.
Drive safely!
Child restraint registration and recalls
Registering a child restraint
Child restraints could be recalled for safety
reasons. You must register your child
restraint to be reached in a recall. To stay
informed about child safety seat recalls, be
sure to fill out and return the registration card
that comes with new child restraints.
Child restraint recall information is readily
available in both the U.S. and Canada. For
recall information in the U.S., call the U.S.
Government's Auto Safety Hotline at
1-800-424-9393 or go to http://www-
odi.nhtsa.dot.gov/cars/problems/recalls/
register/childseat/index.cfm. In Canada, visit
Transport Canada's Child Safety website at
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/childsafety/
menu.htm.
01 Safety
Child restraint systems
01
41
Child restraints
G026491
Infant seat
There are three main types of child restraint
systems: infant seats, convertible seats, and
booster cushions. They are classified accord-
ing to the child's age and size.
The following section provides general infor-
mation on securing a child restraint using a
three-point seat belt. Refer to page 49 and
page 51 for information on securing a child
restraint using ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors
and/or top tether anchorages.
G026503
Convertible seat
WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the
front passenger seat of any vehicle with a
front passenger airbag – not even if the
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF symbol near
the rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehi-
cles equipped with Occupant Weight Sen-
sor). If the severity of an accident were to
cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead
to serious injury or death to a child seated
in this position.
G026489
Booster cushion
WARNING
Always refer to the child restraint manufac-
turer's instructions for detailed information
on securing the restraint.
01 Safety
Child restraint systems
01
42
WARNING
When not in use, keep the child
restraint system secured or remove it
from the passenger compartment to
help prevent it from injuring passen-
gers in the event of a sudden stop or
collision.
A small child's head represents a con-
siderable part of its total weight and its
neck is still very weak. Volvo recom-
mends that children up to age 4 travel,
properly restrained, facing rearward. In
addition, Volvo recommends that chil-
dren should ride rearward facing,
properly restrained, as long as possi-
ble.
01 Safety
Infant seats
01
43
Securing an infant seat with a seat
belt
G026417
Do not place the infant seat in the front passeng-
er's seat
NOTE
Refer to page 49 and page 51 for infor-
mation on securing a child restraint using
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and/or top
tether anchorages.
G026493
Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat
WARNING
An infant seat must be in the rear-facing
position only.
The infant seat should not be positioned
behind the driver's seat unless there is
adequate space for safe installation.
1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of
the vehicle.
2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat
according to the manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
G026492
Fasten the seat belt
WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the
front passenger seat of any vehicle with a
front passenger airbag – not even if the
"Passenger airbag off" symbol near the
rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles
equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If
the severity of an accident were to cause
the airbag to inflate, this could lead to seri-
ous injury or death to a child seated in this
position.
01 Safety
Infant seats
01
44
3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.
G026494
Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt
4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt
out as far as possible to activate the
belt's automatic locking function.
Ensure that the seat is securely in place
NOTE
The locking retractor will automatically
release when the seat belt is unbuckled
and allowed to retract fully.
5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let
the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A
sound from the seat belt retractor's auto-
matic locking function will be audible at
this time and is normal. The seat belt
should now be locked in place.
6. Push and pull the infant seat along the
seat belt path to ensure that it is held
securely in place by the seat belt.
WARNING
It should not be possible to move the child
restraint (child seat) more than 1 in.
(2.5 cm) in any direction along the seat belt
path.
The infant seat can be removed by unbuck-
ling the seat belt and letting it retract com-
pletely.
01 Safety
Convertible seats
01
45
Securing a convertible seat with a
seat belt
G026420
Do not place the convertible seat in the front
passenger's seat
NOTE
Refer to page 49 and page 51 for infor-
mation on securing a child restraint using
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and/or top
tether anchorages.
Convertible seats can be used in either a for-
ward or rearward-facing position, depending
on the age and size of the child.
WARNING
Always use a convertible seat that is suita-
ble for the child's age and size. See the
convertible seat manufacturer's recom-
mendations.
G026503
Route the seat belt through the convertible seat
WARNING
A small child's head represents a consid-
erable part of its total weight and its neck
is still very weak. Volvo recommends that
children up to age 4 travel, properly
restrained, facing rearward. In addition,
Volvo recommends that children should
ride rearward facing, properly restrained,
as long as possible.
G026500
Fasten the seat belt
01 Safety
Convertible seats
01
46
WARNING
Convertible child seats should be instal-
led in the rear seat only.
A rear-facing convertible seat should
not be positioned behind the driver's
seat unless there is adequate space for
safe installation.
1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat
of the vehicle.
2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible
seat according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.
4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt
out as far as possible to activate the
belt's automatic locking function.
G026501
Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt
NOTE
The locking retractor will automatically
release when the seat belt is unbuckled
and allowed to retract fully.
5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place,
let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A
sound from the seat belt retractor's auto-
matic locking function will be audible at
this time and is normal. The seat belt
should now be locked in place.
6. Push and pull the convertible seat along
the seat belt path to ensure that it is held
securely in place by the seat belt.
Ensure that the seat is securely in place
WARNING
It should not be possible to move the child
restraint (child seat) more than 1 in.
(2.5 cm) in any direction along the seat belt
path.
The convertible seat can be removed by
unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract
completely.
01 Safety
Convertible seats
01
47
WARNING
A child seat should never be used in the
front passenger seat of any vehicle with a
front passenger airbag – not even if the
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF symbol near
the rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehi-
cles equipped with Occupant Weight Sen-
sor). If the severity of an accident were to
cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead
to serious injury or death to a child seated
in this position.
01 Safety
Booster cushions
01
48
Securing a booster cushion
G026513
Position the child correctly on the booster cush-
ion
Booster cushions are recommended for chil-
dren who have outgrown convertible seats.
1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat
of the vehicle.
2. With the child properly seated on the
booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or
around the cushion according to the
manufacturer's instructions.
3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch
plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct
click is audible.
G026517
Positioning the seat belt
4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut
and fits snugly around the child.
WARNING
The hip section of the three-point seat
belt must fit snugly across the child's
hips, not across the stomach.
The shoulder section of the three-point
seat belt should be positioned across
the chest and shoulder.
The shoulder belt must never be
placed behind the child's back or
under the arm.
01 Safety
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors
01
49
Using the ISOFIX/LATCH lower child
seat anchors
G015268
ISOFIX/LATCH lower child restraint anchors
Lower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equipped
child seats are located in the second row,
outboard seats, hidden below the backrest
cushions. Symbols on the seat back uphols-
tery mark the anchor positions (see the illus-
tration).
To access the anchors:
1. Put the child restraint in position.
2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down
the seat cushion and locate the anchors
by feel.
3. Fasten the attachment on the child
restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX/
LATCH lower anchors.
4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps
according to the manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
WARNING
Volvo's ISOFIX/LATCH anchors conform to
FMVSS/CMVSS standards. Always refer to
the child restraint system's manual for
weight and size ratings.
WARNING
The ISOFIX/LATCH lower child restraint
anchors are only intended for use with
child seats positioned in the outboard
seating positions. These anchors are not
certified for use with any child restraint
that is positioned in the center seating
position. When securing a child restraint in
the center seating position, use only the
vehicle's center seat belt.
NOTE
The rear seat's center position is not
equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH lower
anchors. When installing a child
restraint in this position, attach the
restraint's top tether strap (if it is so
equipped) to the top tether anchorage
point and secure the restraint with the
vehicle's center seat belt.
Always follow your child seat manufac-
turer's installation instructions, and
use both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors
and top tethers whenever possible.
G031682
Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/
LATCH lower anchors
01 Safety
ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors
01
50
WARNING
Be sure to fasten the attachment correctly
to the anchor (see the illustration). If the
attachment is not correctly fastened, the
child restraint may not be properly secured
in the event of a collision.
01 Safety
Top tether anchors
01
51
Top tether anchors
G027032
Top tether anchorage points
Your vehicle is equipped with child restraint
top tether anchorages in all second row seat
positions (second-row seats only in 7-seat
models).
Using the top tether anchorages
Place the child restraint on the rear seat.
Route the top tether strap under the head
restraint and fasten its attachment to the
anchorage.
WARNING
Be sure to fasten the child tether attach-
ment correctly to the anchor. If it is not
correctly fastened, the child seat may not
be properly restrained in the event of a
collision.
Firmly tension the top tether strap
according to the child restraint manufac-
turer's instructions. Tension the top tether
strap only after the lower anchor straps or
the seat belt have been firmly tensioned.
For securing the child restraint to ISOFIX/
LATCH lower anchors,see page 49.
WARNING
Always refer to the recommendations
made by the child restraint manufac-
turer.
Volvo recommends that the top tether
anchors be used when installing a for-
ward-facing child restraint.
Never route a top tether strap over the
top or around the head restraint. It
should always be routed under the
head restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat belts or
harnesses. The anchorages are not
able to withstand excessive forces on
them in the event of collision if full har-
ness seat belts or adult seat belts are
installed to them. An adult who uses a
belt anchored in a child restraint
anchorage runs a great risk of suffer-
ing severe injuries should a collision
occur.
Do not install rear speakers that
require the removal of the top tether
anchors or interfere with the proper
use of the top tether strap.
01 Safety
Integrated booster cushion
01
52
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Integrated booster cushion*
G031071
Volvo's own integrated booster cushion has
been specially designed to help safeguard a
child seated in the rear seat. When using an
integrated booster cushion, the child must be
secured with the vehicle's three-point seat
belt.
Use this booster cushion only with children
who weigh between 33 and 80 lbs (15 and
36 kg) and whose height is between 38 and
54 in (97 and 137 cm). In Canada, Transport
Canada's weight recommendation is 40 –
80 lbs (18 – 36 kg).
The booster cushion is designed to raise the
child higher, so that the shoulder strap
crosses over the child's collarbone, not over
the child's neck. If using a booster cushion
does not result in proper positioning of the
shoulder strap, then the child should be
placed in a properly secured child restraint
(see page 38 for information). The shoulder
belt must never be placed behind the child's
back or under the arm.
WARNING
Death or serious injury can
occur.
Follow all instructions on the booster
cushion and in the vehicle's owner's
manual.
Make sure the booster cush-
ion is securely locked before
the child is seated.
Use this booster cushion only with
children who weigh between 33 and
80 lbs (15 and 36 kg) and whose
height is between 38 and 54 in (97 and
137 cm). In Canada, Transport Cana-
da's weight recommendation is 40 –
80 lbs (18 - 36 kg).
In the event of a collision while the
integrated booster cushion was occu-
pied, the entire booster cushion and
seat belt must be replaced. The
booster cushion should also be
replaced if it is badly worn or damaged
in any way. This work should be per-
formed by an authorized Volvo retailer
only.
01 Safety
Integrated booster cushion
01
53
NOTE
Canada only: This cushion may be referred
to as a built-in booster cushion.
G030708
Raising
1. Pull the handle at the front of the cushion
forward.
2. Move the seat belt latch aside before
raising the cushion.
3. With both hands push the cushion rear-
ward.
4. Push the cushion until it locks in place.
Lowering
1. Pull the handle at the front of the cushion
forward.
2. Pull the seat forward and press it down
until it locks in place.
The booster cushion must be pressed down
before the backrest can be folded down.
54
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Instrument overview................................................................................ 56
Instrument panel..................................................................................... 58
Information display.................................................................................. 62
Center console buttons........................................................................... 64
Steering wheel adjustment..................................................................... 66
Lighting panel.......................................................................................... 67
Manually unlocking the fuel filler door.................................................... 70
Left-side steering wheel lever................................................................. 71
Right-side steering wheel lever............................................................... 72
Hazard warning flashers......................................................................... 75
Trip computer.......................................................................................... 76
Cruise control.......................................................................................... 78
12-volt sockets....................................................................................... 80
Hood/tailgate.......................................................................................... 81
Power windows....................................................................................... 82
Mirrors..................................................................................................... 84
Power moonroof..................................................................................... 87
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System*.................................................... 89
I N S T R U M E N T S A N D C O N T R O L S
02 Instruments and controls
Instrument overview
02
56
02 Instruments and controls
Instrument overview
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
57
Headlights/Parking lights
Panel vents
Display
Temperature gauge
Odometer/Trip odometer/Cruise control
indicator
Speedometer
Turn signal indicator lights
Tachometer
Ambient temperature gauge, clock, gear
indicator
Fuel gauge
Indicator and warning symbols
Panel vents
Glove compartment
Hazard warning flashers
Audio system
Climate system controls
Windshield wiper/washer lever
Audio control buttons in steering wheel
Instrument panel
Horn
Cruise control buttons in steering wheel
Turn signals, High/low beams, READ-
button
Parking brake pedal
Parking brake release handle
Reading lights
Courtesy light
Moonroof control*
Seat belt reminder
Rearview mirror
Control panel in the driver's door
G029570
Central locking button
Lockout switch for rear seat power win-
dows
Power window controls
Door mirror controls
02 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel
02
58
Instrument panel
G027133
Turn signal indicators – right/left
Text window – The text window displays
information and warning messages.
Temperature gauge – The pointer should
be approximately midway on the gauge
when driving. Do not drive the vehicle if
the warning light is on. The text window
will provide you with additional informa-
tion. If the engine temperature remains
high, check coolant level – see page 224.
Trip odometer – The trip odometers are
used for measuring shorter distances.
The right-hand digit gives tenth of a mile/
kilometer. Press the button for more than
2 seconds to reset. Change between trip
odometers 1 and 2 using one short press
on the button. The display presents infor-
mation and warning messages, the ambi-
ent temperature, and the clock, etc.
When the ambient temperature is
between 23° and 36 °F (–5° and +2 °C), a
snowflake symbol is shown in the display.
This symbol serves as a warning for pos-
sible slippery road surfaces. Please note
that this symbol does not indicate a fault
with your car. At low speeds, or when the
car is not moving, the temperature read-
ings may be slightly higher than the
actual ambient temperature.
Odometer
Speedometer
Warning symbol
High beam indicator
Tachometer – The tachometer shows
engine speed in thousands of revolutions
per minute (rpm). Do not drive continu-
ously with the needle in the red area of
the dial, which indicates maximum allow-
able engine rpm range. Instead, shift to a
higher gear or slow the vehicle down. The
engine management system will automat-
ically prevent excessively high engines
speeds. This will be noticeable as a pro-
nounced unevenness in engine speed.
02 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel
02
59
Gear and driving mode indicator – The
currently selected driving mode is dis-
played here. If you use the Geartronic
function on the automatic transmission,
the currently selected gear will be dis-
played.
Ambient temperature gauge – This dis-
play indicates the air temperature outside
your vehicle. A "snowflake" symbol in the
text window is displayed when the tem-
perature is in the range of 23 – 36 °F (–5 –
+2 °C). Please note that this symbol does
not indicate a fault with your vehicle. At
low speeds or when the vehicle is not
moving, the temperature readings may be
slightly higher than the actual ambient
temperature.
Clock/set button – Turn the button to set
the clock.
Fuel gauge – see page 288 for fuel tank
volume. When the warning light in the
gauge comes on, the vehicle should be
refueled as soon as possible. The trip
computer section (see page 76) pro-
vides more information on fuel level and
consumption.
Indicator and warning symbols – The indi-
cator and warning symbols
1
light up when
you turn the ignition key to the driving
position (position II) before starting.
G027134
This shows that the symbols are functioning.
When the engine starts, all symbols go out. If
the engine is not started within 5 seconds, all
symbols except CHECK ENGINE and
go out. Certain symbols may not have their
functions illustrated, depending on the vehi-
cle's equipment. The symbol for the parking
brake goes out when the parking brake is
released.
Warning/information symbol in center
of the instrument panel
This symbol shines as a red or
yellow light depending on the
nature of the information dis-
played.
Red symbol – Stop the vehicle as soon as
possible in a suitable location and read the
message shown in the text window. The sym-
bol and accompanying text will remain on
until the fault has been corrected.
Yellow symbol – Follow the instructions
shown in the text window. The text can be
erased by pressing the READ button (see
page 62), or will disappear automatically
after two minutes.
NOTE
When the message TIME FOR REGULAR
SERVICE is displayed, the text can be
erased and the yellow symbol light can be
turned off by pressing the READ button.
The text will disappear and the symbol
light will go out automatically after two
minutes.
1
On certain engines, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Instead, a text warning is provided in the information display, see page 222.
02 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel
02
60
Seat belt reminder
This symbol lights up to indicate
that the driver has not fastened
his/her seat belt.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
If this light comes on while the
vehicle is being driven, or remains
on for longer than approximately
10 seconds after the vehicle has
been started, the SRS system's
diagnostic functions have detected a fault in
a seat belt lock or pretensioner, a front air-
bag, side impact airbag, and/or an inflatable
curtain. Have the system(s) inspected by a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician
as soon as possible.
BRAKE – Brake failure warning light
If the light comes on while driving or braking,
stop immediately, open the hood and check
the brake fluid level in the reservoir. see
page 225.
Canadian models are equipped
with this warning light.
If the BRAKE and ABS warning lights come
on at the same time, this could indicate a
fault in the brake system.
Stop the vehicle in a suitable place and
switch off the engine.
Restart the engine.
If both warning lights go off, no further
action is required.
If both lights are still on after the engine
has been restarted, switch off the engine
again and check the brake fluid level (see
page 225 for the location of the brake
fluid reservoir).
If the brake fluid level is above the MIN mark,
drive carefully to a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician and have the brake system
inspected.
WARNING
If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in
the reservoir or if a
Brake failure –
Service urgent message is displayed in
the text window: DO NOT DRIVE. Have
the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician and have the
brake system inspected.
PARK BRAKE Parking brake applied
This light will be on when the parking brake
(hand brake) is applied. The parking brake
pedal is located on the left side of the driver's
footwell, see page 80 for more information.
Canadian models are equipped
with this symbol.
Oil pressure warning light
2
If the light comes on while driv-
ing, stop the vehicle and then
stop the engine immediately
and check the engine oil level,
see page 62. If the light stays
on after restart, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest trained and qualified Volvo service
technician. After hard driving, the light may
come on occasionally when the engine is
idling. This is normal, provided it goes off
when the engine speed is increased.
Generator warning light
If the light comes on while the
engine is running, have the charg-
ing system checked.
2
On certain engines, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Instead, a text warning is provided in the information display, see page 62.
02 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel
02
61
Rear fog light
This light indicates that the fog
light is on.
CHECK ENGINE Malfunction indicator
light
On-Board Diagnostics II (OBDII): As you
drive, a computer called "OBDII" monitors
your vehicle's engine, transmission, electrical
and emission systems. The CHECK ENGINE
light will light up if the computer senses a
condition that potentially may need correct-
ing. When this happens, please have your
vehicle checked by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician as soon as possible.
A CHECK ENGINE light may have many cau-
ses. Sometimes, you may not notice a
change in your vehicle's behavior. Even so,
an uncorrected condition could hurt fuel
economy, emission cleanliness, and driveabil-
ity. Extended driving without correcting the
cause could even damage other components
in your vehicle.
Canadian models are equipped
with this symbol for the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light.
ABS (Anti-lock brake system)
If the warning light comes on,
there is a malfunction of the ABS
system (the standard braking sys-
tem will still function). The vehicle
should be driven to a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician for inspec-
tion. See page 154 for additional information.
DSTC system
The Dynamic Stability and Trac-
tion Control system (DSTC) is
explained in greater detail on
page 158.
Tire pressure monitoring light
See page 203 for more informa-
tion on this function.
Turn signal indicator – trailer (certain
models)
If you are towing a trailer, this
light will flash simultaneously with
the turn signals on the trailer. If
the light does not flash when sig-
naling, neither the trailer's turn
signals nor the vehicle's turn signals are func-
tioning.
02 Instruments and controls
Information display
02
62
Message in the text windows
G026979
When a warning light in the instrument panel
comes on, a message is also displayed in the
text window. After you have read the mes-
sage, you can erase it by pressing button A
(see illustration).
NOTE
Certain messages cannot be erased until
the condition has been corrected.
If a warning message is displayed when e.g.
you are using the trip computer, this message
must be erased before you can access the
function of your choice. Press button A to
erase the warning message.
You can scroll through the stored messages
by pressing button A (see illustration). The
text window can be cleared (the message will
be returned to memory) by pressing button A
again.
Message Meaning
BRAKE FAILURE STOP
SAFELY
A
Stop the car in a safe place and switch off the engine to help prevent the risk of serious damage.
COOLANT LOW STOP
ENGINE
B
Stop the car in a safe place and switch off the engine to help prevent the risk of serious damage.
BRAKE FLUID LOW SERVICE
URGENT
C
Take your vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for inspection immediately.
HIGH ENGINE TEMP SEE
MANUAL
D
Refer to your owner's manual. For additional information, please contact your Volvo retailer.
02 Instruments and controls
Information display
02
63
Message Meaning
ABS SERVICE REQUIRED
E
Take your vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for inspection at your convenience (but
preferably before the next scheduled maintenance service).
TIME FOR REGULAR MAIN-
TENANCE
This message will be displayed at 10,000 mile (16,000 km) intervals, after 500 hours of driving or after
12 months, whichever occurs first, to remind the driver that the service interval has been exceeded. The mes-
sage will be displayed for 2 minutes each time the vehicle is started until reset by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF
The stability system's spin control function has been turned off, see page 158 for details.
A
This is one example of several similar texts containing "stop safely"
B
This is one example of several similar texts containing "stop engine"
C
This is one example of several similar texts containing "service urgent"
D
This is one example of several similar texts containing "see manual"
E
This is one example of several similar texts containing "service required"
02 Instruments and controls
Center console buttons
02
64
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G026944
Active Bending Lights*
The beams of these headlights
adjust laterally to help light up
a curve according to move-
ments of the steering wheel
when the vehicle is turning.
This function is activated auto-
matically when the engine is started and can
be deactivated/reactivated by pressing the
button. The indicator light in the button is on
when the function is activated, also see
page 67.
Rear seat air conditioning*
This button controls the
optional rear seat air condi-
tioning system.
Folding door mirrors*
Press the button and release it
to fold the door mirrors in or
out. On certain models, when
the button is pressed, there
may be a long pause before
the mirrors move. Pressing the
button again during this pause may erase
your first button press. If this happens, wait
ten seconds and press the button one more
time.
The mirrors cannot be adjusted during the
first ten seconds after they have been folded
out.
02 Instruments and controls
Center console buttons
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
65
NOTE
If the door mirrors have been inadvertently
pushed out of position (in a car wash,
parking lot, etc.) manually return them to
normal position. If mirror adjustment does
not seem to operate after manual folding,
reset the folding mirrors as follows:
Turn the ignition key to position II.
Manually fold the mirror(s) to the nor-
mal position.
Press the button to fold both mirrors
in.
Press the button again to fold the mir-
rors out to their normal position.
Park Assist*
This system provides an audi-
ble warning when the vehicle
is being parked or if it is driven
close to a person or object.
For more information see
page 160.
NOTE
The system activates automatically when
the engine is started, and can be deacti-
vated by pressing this button (e.g. when
towing a trailer) or reactivated if necessary.
Auxiliary lights
This button is used to switch
on auxiliary lights (if installed).
A light in the button will light
up to indicate that the auxiliary
lights are illuminated.
12-volt sockets
The 12-volt sockets can be
used to plug in certain acces-
sories such as cell phones,
etc. The ignition key must be
in position I (or higher) for the
auxiliary socket to function.
The maximum current consumption is 10A
(120W) if only one of the 12-volt sockets is in
use. If both the front and rear sockets are
used at the same time, the maximum current
consumption per socket is 7.5A (90W).
NOTE
The auxiliary sockets can also be used for
cigarette lighters, which are available as
accessories at your Volvo retailer.
Power child locks*
For more information on this
function, see page 132.
02 Instruments and controls
Steering wheel adjustment
02
66
G026999
Both the height and the reach of the steering
wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable posi-
tion for the driver. Pull down the lever on the
left of the steering column. Adjust the steer-
ing wheel to a suitable position and press the
lever back into place to lock the steering
wheel in the new position. Check that the
steering wheel is locked in the new position.
WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel while driv-
ing.
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
02
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
67
Headlight/parking light switch
LED daytime running lights (DRL) in front
spoiler
Rear fog light
Instrument panel lighting
Fuel filler door unlock button
Pos. Lighting
Headlights off
A
. Pull the left-side
steering wheel lever to flash the
high beam headlights.
Parking lights (the LED daytime
running lights in the front spoiler
do not function with the switch in
this position
B
)
Low beam headlights and parking
lights on. Pull the left-side steer-
ing wheel lever to toggle between
high and low beams.
If the vehicle is equipped with the
optional Active Bending Lights
(ABL), this feature will also be
activated with the light switch in
this position.
The switch must also be in this
position for the LED daytime run-
ning lights to function (see
page 68).
A
On Canadian models, the LED daytime running lights in the
front spoiler will be on.
B
On Canadian models, the LED daytime running lights in the
front spoiler will remain on.
Headlights
To illuminate the headlights, the ignition key
must be turned to at least position II and the
headlight switch must be in position
.
For information on switching between high
and low beams, see page 71.
Active Bending Lights (ABL)*
G020789
Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Light
function deactivated (left headlight beam) and
activated (right headlight beam)
When this function is activated, the headlight
beams adjust laterally to help light up a curve
according to movements of the steering
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
02
68
wheel (see the right-pointing beam in the
illustration).
NOTE
When driving in daylight conditions, the
headlights will switch off and the daytime
running lights will come on. In darkness,
the daytime running lights will switch off
and the Active Bending Lights will switch
on.
The ABL function is activated automatically
when the engine is started and the headlight
switch is in the
position and can be
deactivated/reactivated by pressing the but-
ton in the center console (see page 64.
LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
To help conserve fuel by reducing the use of
electrical current in the vehicle, DRL can be
used in daylight conditions instead of the low
beam headlights, which consume more elec-
trical current. The daytime running lights are
mounted in the front spoiler and use bright,
electricity-saving LEDs (light emitting diodes).
Press button A to activate automatic DRL in day-
light driving conditions
With the headlight switch in the
posi-
tion as shown in the illustration, press the
button with the A symbol to activate the auto-
matic LED daytime running lights in daylight
driving conditions (the indicator light in the
button will illuminate). A light sensor then
monitors the ambient lighting conditions and
automatically switches from LED DRL to the
low beam headlights in weaker ambient light
(and will switch back to DRL when the ambi-
ent light becomes brighter). Press the button
again (the indicator light in the switch will turn
off) to switch on the headlights.
The LED DRLs will also switch off automati-
cally (and the low beams will switch on) if:
The rear fog light is switched on
The windshield wipers are switched on
for more than 10 seconds
If the LED DRL function was activated when
the ignition was switched off, it will be active
when the ignition is switched on again.
WARNING
DRL is a driving aid designed to help
conserve electrical current. This sys-
tem cannot always determine if the
ambient lighting conditions are suffi-
cient for switching from low beams to
DRL (or vice versa). It is always the
driver's responsibility to visually deter-
mine if the low beam headlights should
be used.
As the driver, you have full responsibil-
ity for operating the vehicle in a safe
manner.
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
02
69
Parking lights
The front and rear parking lights can be
turned on even when the ignition is switched
off.
Turn switch (1) to position .
The license plate lights also illuminate when
the parking lights are switched on.
Rear fog light
The single rear fog light is located in the driv-
er's side of the vehicle.
The rear fog light will only function in combi-
nation with the high/low beam headlights.
1. Turn the ignition key to position II.
2. Press button (3) to turn on the rear fog
light.
An indicator light in the button illuminates
when the rear fog light is on.
NOTE
The rear fog light is considerably brighter
than the normal tail lights and should be
used only when conditions such as fog,
rain, snow, smoke or dust reduce visibility
for other vehicles to less than 500 ft.
(150 meters).
Instrument panel lighting
The instrument panel lighting illuminates
when the ignition key is in position II and the
light switch (1) is in either position
or
.
Move the thumb wheel (4) up to increase
brightness or down to decrease bright-
ness.
Unlocking the fuel filler door
Press button (5) when the vehicle is at a
standstill to unlock the fuel filler door. Please
note that the fuel filler door will remain
unlocked until the vehicle begins to move for-
ward. An audible click will be heard when the
fuel filler door relocks.
NOTE
If the fuel filler door does not unlock after
the button has been pressed, drive the
vehicle at a speed of at least 5 mph
(8 km/h), stop the vehicle, and press the
button again.
For information on unlocking the fuel filler
door manually, see page 70.
02 Instruments and controls
Manually unlocking the fuel filler door
02
70
Panel on passenger's side of cargo area
To manually unlock the fuel filler door
1. Open the upper and lower sections of the
tailgate, and fold up the rear section of
the cargo area floor.
2. If the vehicle is equipped with the
optional grocery bag holder, detach the
holder's bands.
3. Remove the corner panel from the floor of
the cargo area.
4. Open the cover in the side panel by pull-
ing the tab upward/outward.
5. Pull down the insulating material to
access the fuel filler door motor.
6. Move the catch rearward to unlock the
fuel filler door lock, or move it forward to
lock the filler door.
02 Instruments and controls
Left-side steering wheel lever
02
71
Lever positions
G026954
Turn signals, lane change position
Turn signals, position for normal turns
High beam flash
Toggle between high and low beams,
Home Safe lighting
Turn signals
When turning
Move the lever as far up or down as possible
(to position 2) to start the turn signals. The
turn signals will be cancelled automatically by
the movement of the steering wheel, or the
lever can be returned to its initial position by
hand.
When changing lanes
The driver can automatically flash the turn
signals 3 times by:
Moving the turn signal lever up or down
to position (1) and releasing it.
Moving the lever up or down to position
(2) and immediately back to its original
position.
NOTE
This automatic flashing sequence can
be interrupted by immediately moving
the lever in the opposite direction.
If the turn signal indicator flashes
faster than normal, check for a
burned-out turn signal bulb.
High/low beam headlights
Continuous high beams
1. Turn the ignition key to position II.
2.
With the light switch in position
,
(see page 67) pull the turn signal lever
toward the steering wheel to toggle
between high and low beams.
High beam flash
1. Turn the ignition key to position II.
2. Pull the turn signal lever to position (3).
The high beams will remain on until the
lever is released.
Home safe lighting
When leaving your vehicle at night, home safe
lighting can illuminate the area in front of the
vehicle.
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
2. Pull the turn signal lever as far as possible
toward the steering wheel and release it.
3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors.
The headlights and parking lights will illumi-
nate and remain on for 30
1
, 60 or 90 seconds.
The time interval can be changed by a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician.
1
Factory setting
02 Instruments and controls
Right-side steering wheel lever
02
72
Windshield wipers
G026953
Thumb wheel
Rain sensor on/off
Windshield wipers off
If the lever is in the 0 position and
you move it upwards, the wipers
will sweep one stroke at a time for
as long as you hold the lever up.
Single sweep position
Move the lever slightly upward
from the 0 position for one sweep
of the wipers. The lever returns
automatically to 0 when released.
Intermittent wiper function
With the lever in this position, you
can set the wiper interval by
twisting the control ring (1)
upward to increase wiper speed
or downward to decrease the
speed.
Windshield washer/headlight washer
(certain models)
When the lever is pulled to wash the wind-
shield, high pressure jets mounted in the
bumper will spray the headlights.
CAUTION
Use ample washer fluid when washing
the windshield to avoid scratching the
glass. The windshield should be thor-
oughly wet when the wipers are in
operation.
Before using the wipers, ice and snow
should be removed from the wind-
shield/rear window. Be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen in place.
To conserve washer fluid in driving condi-
tions where the windshield washers are
used frequently, the headlights will only
be washed once for every five times the
windshield is washed within a 10-minute
period.
A short pull on the lever will wash the
windshield only.
When approximately 1 US quart (1 liter)
remains in the washer fluid reservoir, the
headlights will not be washed when the
lever is pulled to conserve washer fluid
for the windshield. A text message will
also be displayed to remind the driver to
fill the washer fluid reservoir.
Continuous wiper function
Top arrow: normal speed
Bottom arrows: higher speed
02 Instruments and controls
Right-side steering wheel lever
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
73
Tailgate wiper/washer
G027127
Intermittent wiping: Press the upper
section of the switch
Neutral position: The wiper is
switched off
Normal (continuous) wiping: Press the
lower section of the switch
Move the lever forward to start the tailgate
washer. After washing the rear window, the
wiper will make several additional sweeps.
Tailgate wiper and reverse gear
If the front wipers are on and the transmission
is put into reverse gear, the tailgate wiper will
go into intermittent wiping function
1
.
If the tailgate wiper is already in normal wip-
ing function, the normal wiping function will
continue.
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor automatically regulates wiper
speed according to the amount of water on
the windshield.
The sensitivity of the sensor can be adjusted
by twisting ring (1) up (the wipers will sweep
the windshield more frequently) or down (the
wipers will sweep the windshield less fre-
quently).
Activating the rain sensor:
1. Turn the ignition key to at least position I
and put the windshield wiper lever in
position 0.
2. Press button (2), see page 72.
> A light in the button will light up to indi-
cate that the rain sensor is active.
Deactivating the rain sensor:
Press button (2), see page 72.
or
Move the windshield wiper lever down to
another position. Moving the lever up will
not deactivate the rain sensor. Doing so
will cause the wipers to sweep the wind-
shield until the lever is released, at which
time the wipers return to rain sensor
mode.
The rain sensor is also deactivated when the
key is removed from the ignition.
CAUTION
The rain sensor should be deactivated
when washing the vehicle in an automatic
car wash, etc. If the rain sensor function is
left on, the wipers will start inadvertently in
the car wash and could be damaged.
1
Consult your Volvo retailer if you would like to have this function deactivated.
02 Instruments and controls
Right-side steering wheel lever
02
74
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
IR-reflecting windshield*
Section of the windshield where the IR-coating is
not applied
An optional factory-installed infrared (IR) coa-
ting can be applied to the windshield to help
protect the cabin from the sun's heat and the
fading effect of sunlight on upholstery, pan-
els, etc.
Electronic equipment such as garage door
openers, electronic toll tags and similar devi-
ces should not be placed on sections of the
windshield with the IR coating because this
could affect their function and limit their
range.
For best performance, place the device on
the section of the windshield without the IR
coating (see the area marked in the illustra-
tion).
02 Instruments and controls
Hazard warning flashers
02
75
Hazard warning flashers
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
0
*
#
POWER
V
O
L
U
M
E
CD
AM FM
G027096
The four-way flasher should be used to indi-
cate that the vehicle has become a traffic
hazard. To activate the flashers, press the tri-
angular button in the center dash. Press the
button again to turn off the flashers.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the use of the haz-
ard warning flasher may vary, depending
on where you live.
Rear window and door mirror defroster
Press the switch to start heat-
ing the rear window and door
mirrors to remove ice or con-
densation. A light in the switch
will light up.
A timer automatically switches off the heating
after approximately 12 minutes. The LED will
go out correspondingly.
02 Instruments and controls
Trip computer
02
76
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Trip computer*
G026956
READ (press to acknowledge/confirm/
erase a message)
Thumb wheel (used to scroll among the
trip computer menus)
RESET
The trip computer stores information gath-
ered from several systems in your vehicle and
has four menus that can be displayed in the
text window.
Driving distance on current fuel reserve
Average fuel consumption
Current fuel consumption
Average speed
Current speed in mph (Canadian models
only)
DSTC (see page 158 for detailed infor-
mation)
NOTE
Warning messages from the vehicle's
monitoring systems will override the trip
computer function. If a warning message is
displayed in the text window while you are
using the trip computer, you must
acknowledge the message by pressing
button A. Press button A again to return to
the trip computer function.
1. Trip computer controls and functions
The trip computer functions can be accessed
by twisting INFO (B) one step at a time in
either direction. Twisting a final time returns
you to the original function.
The trip computer can be reset (current data
will be erased from system memory) by
pressing RESET (button C).
2. Driving distance on current fuel
reserve
This function shows the approximate dis-
tance that can be driven on the fuel remaining
in the tank. The calculation is based on aver-
age fuel consumption during the last 20 miles
(30 km) of driving and the amount of fuel
remaining in the tank when the reading was
taken.
When
"----" is displayed in the text window,
refuel as soon as possible.
3. Average fuel consumption
This value indicates fuel consumption since
the last time the trip computer was reset (by
pressing RESET, button C). When the engine
is switched off, information on fuel consump-
tion is stored and remains in system memory
until the RESET (button C) is pressed again.
4. Current fuel consumption
This value indicates the current fuel con-
sumption, based on readings taken once per
second. When the vehicle is not moving,
"----" will be displayed.
5. Average speed
This value indicates average speed since the
last time the trip computer was reset (by
pressing RESET, button C). When the engine
is switched off, information on average speed
is stored and remains in system memory until
the RESET (button C) is pressed again.
02 Instruments and controls
Trip computer
02
77
6. Current speed in miles per hour
(Canadian models only)
This function provides the driver with an
instantaneous conversion of the vehicle's cur-
rent speed from km/h to mph.
NOTE
Trip computer readings may vary slightly
depending on the circumference of the
tires on the vehicle and driving style.
02 Instruments and controls
Cruise control
02
78
Engaging the cruise control function
G027098
The cruise control panel is located on the left
side of the steering wheel hub.
NOTE
This does not set the vehicle's speed.
1. Press the CRUISE button.
>
CRUISE will be displayed in the infor-
mation window in the instrument
panel.
2. Press + or to set the current speed.
>
CRUISE-ON will be displayed in the
information window in the instrument
panel.
Increasing or decreasing speed
G027139
Use + or in the following ways to increase
or decrease the vehicle's speed:
1. Press and hold down + or until the vehi-
cle reaches the desired speed.
2. Press + or for approximately a half sec-
ond and release the button to increase or
decrease vehicle speed by approximately
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
NOTE
Cruise control will not function at speeds
below 20 mph. (30 km/h).
Braking
Cruise control is automatically disen-
gaged when the brake pedal is
depressed. The currently set speed is
stored in memory.
Pressing resume
will return the vehicle
to the previously set speed.
Acceleration
Momentary acceleration, such as when pass-
ing another vehicle, does not affect cruise
control operation. The vehicle will automati-
cally return to the previously set speed when
you release the accelerator pedal.
Disengaging cruise control
To disengage cruise control, press the
CRUISE button.
CRUISE or CRUISE-ON will
no longer be displayed in the information win-
dow in the instrument panel.
02 Instruments and controls
Cruise control
02
79
NOTE
Cruise control is automatically disengaged
if:
When the brake pedal is depressed.
the engine is switched off
the gear selector is placed in (N) Neu-
tral
the wheels start to spin or lock
if an increase in speed is maintained
for more than one minute
if the vehicle's speed falls below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
Temporarily disengaging the cruise
control
1. Press 0 to temporarily disengage cruise
control.
>
CRUISE will be displayed in the infor-
mation window in the instrument
panel.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
Pressing "resume"
causes the vehicle to
return to the previously set speed.
WARNING
Cruise control should not be used in heavy
traffic or when driving on wet or slippery
roads, or when driving on unpaved or
uneven road surfaces. Cruise control may
not maintain set speed on steep down-
grades.
02 Instruments and controls
12-volt sockets
02
80
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
These 12 volt sockets can be used to plug in
certain accessories such as cellular tele-
phones, etc.
The ignition key must be in at least position I
for the sockets in the front seat and the
optional socket at the rear of the center con-
sole to function.
The maximum current consumption is 10A
(120W) if only one of the 12-volt sockets in
the passenger compartment is in use. If both
the front and rear sockets are used at the
same time, the maximum current consump-
tion per socket is 7.5A (90W).
12-volt socket in the cargo compartment
Fold down the lid to use the socket. This
socket can be used even if the ignition is
switched off.
NOTE
If the 12-volt sockets are used while
the engine is not running, there is a
risk that the vehicle's battery will be
discharged.
If the ignition is switched off and a
device drawing more than 0.1 A is
connected to a socket, a battery warn-
ing will be displayed in the text win-
dow.
The covers should be kept on when
the auxiliary sockets are not in use.
G028425
12-volt socket at the rear of the center console*
Ashtrays/cigarette lighter
The auxiliary socket can also be used to
power a cigarette lighter. Accessory cigarette
lighters and ashtrays can be purchased from
your Volvo retailer.
12-volt socket in the cargo compartment
02 Instruments and controls
Hood/tailgate
02
81
Opening/closing the hood
G026995
Opening the hood
1. Pull the lever located under the left side
of the dashboard to release the hood
lock.
2. Lift the hood slightly.
3. Press up the release control located
under the front edge of the hood and lift.
To close the hood, place your hand on it and
press down until the hood locks in the closed
position.
WARNING
Do not grasp the ribs in the grille when
closing the hood. If your fingers pro-
trude through the grille, they could be
injured on components in the engine
compartment as the grille closes. We
recommend pressing down on the
hood to close it.
Check that the hood locks properly
when closed!
Opening the tailgate
To open the upper section of the tailgate, pull
the handle downward.
To fold down the lower section of the tailgate,
pull handle upward.
02 Instruments and controls
Power windows
02
82
Power windows
The power windows are controlled by buttons
in the arm rests. The ignition switch must be
ON
1
(ignition key in position I, II or the engine
running) for the electrically operated windows
to function.
To lower: Press down the front edge of the
button to the first detent ("stop").
To raise: Lightly pull up the front edge of the
button to the first detent ("stop").
Auto up/down function (front doors
only):
Either front door window can be opened or
closed automatically.
Auto down: Press the front part of the button
as far down as possible and release it imme-
diately. To stop the window at any time, pull
the button up.
Auto up: Pull the front part of the button up
as far as possible and release it immediately.
To stop the window at any time, press the
button down.
G029571
Power window controls
Front windows
Rear windows
NOTE
If a window is obstructed during auto-up, it
will automatically reverse direction and
return to its starting position. If a window is
repeatedly obstructed during auto-up
operation, an overload protection circuit
breaker will temporarily halt window func-
tion. The window will return to normal
function after a brief cool-down period.
WARNING
Always remove the ignition key when the
vehicle is unattended.
Make sure that the windows are com-
pletely unobstructed before they are oper-
ated.
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
NOTE
To reduce buffeting wind noise if the rear
windows are opened, also open the front
windows slightly.
G029572
1
The power windows will also function after the ignition has been switched off as long as neither of the front doors has been opened.
02 Instruments and controls
Power windows
02
83
Lockout switch for rear windows
The power rear door windows can be disa-
bled by a switch located on the driver's door
(see illustration).
If the light in the switch is OFF: The rear
door windows can be raised or lowered with
the buttons on the rear door armrests or with
the buttons on the driver's door armrest.
If the light in the switch is ON: The rear
door windows can only be raised or lowered
with the buttons on the driver's door armrest.
G029573
Power window on the front passenger's
side
The control for the power window in the front
passenger's seat operates that window only.
G029574
Power windows in the rear doors
The rear door windows can be operated with
the control on each door and the switch on
the driver's door. If the light in the switch for
blocking power windows in the rear doors
(located in the driver's door control panel) is
on, the rear door windows can only be oper-
ated from the driver's door.
02 Instruments and controls
Mirrors
02
84
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Rearview mirror
G026660
To reduce glare from the headlights of follow-
ing vehicles, use the control to switch
between the normal and night-driving posi-
tions.
Normal position
Night position, reduces glare from follow-
ing headlights
Autodim function*
The autodim function reacts to headlights
from following traffic and automatically
reduces glare.
NOTE
This function is automatically switched off
when the gear selector is placed in the
Reverse position.
Rearview mirror with compass*
G026965
The upper left-hand corner of the rearview
mirror has an integrated display that shows
the compass direction toward which the car
is pointing. Eight different directions can be
displayed:
N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and NW.
The display shows your car's orientation with
respect to true north.
If the compass is activated, it will be dis-
played automatically when the ignition is in
postilion II or when the engine is running. The
compass can be switched off or on by press-
ing the inset button on the rear side of the
mirror (see the inset illustration). This can be
done with straightened paperclip or similar
object. The button is recessed approximately
1 in. (2.5 cm) in the mirror.
G026409
Magnetic zones
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The compass is initially set for the zone to
which the car was delivered, and should
always be adjusted if the car is driven to a
new magnetic zone. To do so:
02 Instruments and controls
Mirrors
02
85
1. Switch the ignition to position II.
2. Press the button on the rear side of the
mirror with straightened paperclip or simi-
lar object for approximately 3 seconds
until
ZONE is displayed. The number of
the current magnetic zone will also be
displayed.
3. Press the button repeatedly until the
number for the desired zone (1 – 15) is
displayed.
C
A
L
Z
O
N
E
C
A
L
Z
O
N
E
G026950
Calibrating the compass
After several seconds, the compass heading
will again be displayed, and the change of
magnetic zones is complete.
Calibrating the compass
1. Stop the car in a large, open area, away
from traffic.
2. Turn off as many electrical devices in the
car as possible to avoid interference with
the compass (e.g. audio system, etc).
3. Using a pen or similar object, hold the
button (on the rear side of the mirror)
depressed for at least 6 seconds. "
CAL"
will be displayed.
4. Drive slowly in a circle at a maximum
speed of 5 m.p.h. (8 km/h) until CAL is no
longer displayed.
NOTE
This step can also be done by driving nor-
mally until CAL is no longer displayed.
Calibration is complete.
Power door mirrors
G029575
The mirror control switches are located on
the driver's door armrest.
Driver's side: Press the L button (a light in
the switch will light up) to activate the adjust-
ment control and then use this control to
adjust the driver's door mirror.
Passenger's door: Press the R button (a
light in the switch will light up) and then use
the adjustment control to adjust the passeng-
er's door mirror.
After you have adjusted the mirror(s), press
the L or R switch again (the light will go out)
to deactivate the adjustment control.
02 Instruments and controls
Mirrors
02
86
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
For information about the optional folding
mirror function see page 64.
WARNING
The mirrors should always be adjusted
prior to driving. Objects seen in the pas-
senger's side wide-angle door mirror are
closer than they appear to be.
Mirror memory function (with the
central locking system)*
If you lock the vehicle and later unlock it with
the same remote key and open the driver's
door, the door mirrors (and the driver's seat)
will automatically move to the position they
were in when you left the vehicle. This feature
will work in the same way with all of the
remote key transmitters (up to 3) that you use
with your vehicle. This feature will not func-
tion if you lock your vehicle with the key.
Water repellent glass
The side door mirrors can be treated
with a water repellent coating. The
symbol to the left indicates these windows
have this coating.
The coating improves vision by causing the
water to run off quickly.
For information on cleaning this type of glass,
see page 210.
CAUTION
Use the heating function to remove ice,
snow, or mist from the mirrors.
02 Instruments and controls
Power moonroof
02
87
Power moonroof
G007503
To operate the moonroof, turn the ignition key
to position I or II, or start the engine. The
moonroof can be operated in two ways:
Tilt position
Sliding moonroof
G027010
Tilt position
Open: With the moonroof closed, push up the
rear edge of the switch (position 5 in the illus-
tration in the center column).
Close: Pull down and hold the rear edge of
the switch (position 6 in the illustration in the
center column) until the moonroof has closed
completely.
Sliding moonroof
Manual open: Pull the switch rearward to
position 3 and hold it until the moonroof has
opened to the position of your choice.
Auto open: Pull the switch as far back as
possible (position 4) and release it to auto-
matically slide open the moonroof to the
"comfort"
1
position. Pull the switch rearward
again to open the moonroof completely.
Manual close: Push the switch to position 2
and hold it until the moonroof has closed
completely or to the position of your choice.
Auto close: Push the switch forward as far as
possible (position 1) and release it to auto-
matically close the moonroof.
CAUTION
Remove ice and snow before opening
the moonroof.
Do not operate the moonroof if it is
frozen closed.
Never place heavy objects on the
moonroof.
1
A position where the moonroof is not quite fully open, which helps alleviate "rumbling" wind noise.
02 Instruments and controls
Power moonroof
02
88
WARNING
Never open/close the moonroof if it is
obstructed in any way when in opera-
tion.
Never allow a child to operate the
moonroof.
Never extend any object or body part
through the open moonroof, even if
the vehicle's ignition is completely
switched off.
Never leave a child alone in a vehicle.
If the moonroof is obstructed during auto-
close operation, it will automatically reverse
direction and return to its starting position. If
the moonroof is repeatedly obstructed during
auto-close operation, an overload circuit
breaker will temporarily halt moonroof func-
tion. The moonroof will return to normal func-
tion after a brief cool-down period.
G020157
Sun visor
The optional moonroof also features a sliding
sun visor. The visor slides open automatically
when the moonroof is opened. The visor must
be closed manually.
WARNING
The moonroof must never be obstructed in
any way when in operation.
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
89
Introduction
G030070
The HomeLink
1
Wireless Control System pro-
vides a convenient way to replace up to three
hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters
used to activate devices such as gate opera-
tors, garage door openers, entry door locks,
security systems, even home lighting. Addi-
tional HomeLink information can be found on
the Internet at www.homelink.com or by
phoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515.
WARNING
If you use HomeLink to open a garage
door or gate, be sure no one is near
the gate or door while it is in motion.
When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park outside of
the garage.
Do not use HomeLink with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and
reverse features as required by U.S.
federal safety standards (this includes
any garage door opener model manu-
factured before April 1, 1982). A
garage door that cannot detect an
object - signaling the door to stop and
reverse - does not meet current U.S.
federal safety standards. For more
information, contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com.
Retain the original transmitter of the RF
device you are programming for use in other
vehicles as well as for future HomeLink pro-
gramming. It is also suggested that upon the
sale of the vehicle, the programmed Home-
Link buttons be erased for security purposes.
Refer to “Resetting HomeLink Buttons” on
page 91.
Programming HomeLink
NOTE
Some vehicles may require the ignition to
be switched on or be in the “accessories”
position for programming and/or operation
of HomeLink. It is also recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being pro-
grammed to HomeLink for quicker training
and accurate transmission of the radio-fre-
quency signal. The HomeLink buttons
must be reset first. When this has been
completed, Homelink is in learning mode
so that you can perform programming.
1. Position the end of your hand-held trans-
mitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from
the HomeLink button you wish to pro-
gram while keeping the indicator light in
view.
2. Simultaneously press and hold both the
chosen HomeLink and hand-held trans-
mitter buttons until the HomeLink indica-
tor light changes from a slow to a rapidly
blinking light. Now you may release both
the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter
buttons.
1
HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System*
02
90
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
Some devices may require you to replace
this Programming Step 2 with procedures
noted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian
Programming” section. If the HomeLink
indicator light does not change to a rapidly
blinking light after performing these steps,
contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com
or by phoning the hotline at
1–800–355–3515.
3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and
release the programmed HomeLink but-
ton up to two separate times to activate
the door. If the door does not activate,
press and hold the just-trained HomeLink
button and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on con-
stantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when
the HomeLink button is pressed and
released.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for
two seconds and then turns to a
constant light continue with “Pro-
gramming” steps 4-6 to complete the
programming of a rolling code equip-
ped device (most commonly a garage
door opener).
4. At the garage door opener receiver
(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate
the “learn” or “smart” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the motor-
head unit.
5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or
“smart” button. (The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.)
There are 30 seconds to initiate step 6.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for two seconds and release the pro-
grammed HomeLink button. Repeat the
“press/hold/release” sequence a second
time, and, depending on the brand of the
garage door opener (or other rolling code
equipped device), repeat this sequence a
third time to complete the programming
process.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling
code equipped device.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans-
mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after sev-
eral seconds of transmission – which may not
be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-
culties programming a gate operator or
garage door opener by using the “Program-
ming” procedures, replace “Programming
HomeLink” step 2 with the following:
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink
button while you press and release -
every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand-
held transmitter until the HomeLink indi-
cator light changes from a slow to a rap-
idly blinking light. Now you may release
both the HomeLink and hand-held trans-
mitter buttons.
Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to com-
plete.
Using HomeLink
To operate, simply press and hold the pro-
grammed HomeLink button until the trained
device begins to operate (this may take sev-
eral seconds). Activation will now occur for
the trained device (i.e., garage door opener,
gate operator, security system, entry door
lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For conven-
ience, the hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time. In the event
that there are still programming difficulties or
questions, contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com or by phoning the hotline
at 1–800–355–3515.
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System*
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
91
NOTE
If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink
will function for 30 minutes after the driv-
er's door has been opened.
Resetting HomeLink Buttons
Use the following procedure to reset (erase
programming) from the three HomeLink but-
tons (individual buttons cannot be reset but
can be “reprogrammed” as outlined in the fol-
lowing section):
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink
buttons until the indicator light begins to
flash.
2. Release both buttons.
> HomeLink is now in the training (or
learning) mode and can be pro-
grammed at any time beginning with
“Programming” - step 1.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink
Button
To program a device to HomeLink using a
HomeLink button previously trained, follow
these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the Home-
Link button, proceed with “Programming”
- step 1.
For questions or comments, contact Home-
Link at: www.homelink.com or phone 1–800–
355–3515.
This device complies with FCC rules part 15
and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) This device must accept any
interference that may be received including
interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE
The transmitter has been tested and com-
plies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or
modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
2
2
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
92
Climate control system – general information........................................ 94
Air distribution......................................................................................... 96
Electronic climate control (ECC)............................................................. 98
C L I M A T E
03 Climate
Climate control system – general information
03
94
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Condensation on the inside of the
windows
Keeping the insides of the windows clean will
help reduce the amount of condensation that
forms on the windows. Use a commercial
window cleaning agent to clean the windows.
Ice and snow
Always keep the air intake grille at the base of
the windshield free of snow.
Cabin air filter
Replace the cabin air filter with a new one at
the recommended intervals. Please refer to
your Warranty and Service Records Informa-
tion booklet, or consult a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for these intervals.
The filter should be replaced more often when
driving under dirty and dusty conditions. The
filter cannot be cleaned and therefore should
always be replaced with a new one.
Sensors
The sunlight sensor on the dashboard and
passenger compartment temperature sensor
in the ECC control panel should not be cov-
ered in any way as this could cause incorrect
information to be sent to the ECC system.
Parking the vehicle in warm weather
If your vehicle has been parked in the sun in
warm weather, opening the windows and
moonroof* for several minutes before driving
will help release the warm air from the pas-
senger compartment. When the engine is run-
ning, close the windows and moonroof and
use the recirculation function for several
minutes to enable the air conditioning to cool
the compartment as quickly as possible.
Windows and optional moonroof
The ECC system will function best if the win-
dows and optional moonroof are closed. If
you drive with the moonroof open, we recom-
mend that you manually adjust the tempera-
ture and blower control (the LED in the AUTO
switch should be off).
Acceleration
The air conditioning is momentarily disen-
gaged during full-throttle acceleration.
Climate control maintenance
Special tools and equipment are required to
maintain and carry out repairs on the climate
system. Work of this type should only be
done by a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
Refrigerant
Volvo cares about the environment. The air
conditioning system in your vehicle contains
a CFC-free refrigerant – R134a (HFC134a).
This substance will not deplete the ozone
layer. The approximate amount of R134a
contained in the system is a follows:
6-cylinder engine
Single A/C system: 1.5 lbs (700 g)
Dual
1
A/C system: 2.2 lbs (1000 g)
The system also uses PAG oil.
1
Includes the optional rear A/C system
03 Climate
Climate control system – general information
03
95
Climate system blower
The climate system blower will be automati-
cally switched off when the engine is not run-
ning (even if the ignition key is in position I or
II) to avoid unnecessary battery drain. To
activate the blower, turn the control to the
desired setting.
The climate system blower may start auto-
matically during a period of up to approxi-
mately 50 minutes after the ignition has been
turned off to remove condensation in the A/C
evaporator. It will run for 15 minutes and
switch off automatically.
Passenger compartment blower
Approximately 50 minutes after the ignition is
turned off, the blower may come on automati-
cally, and run for seven minutes, to remove
condensation in the A/C evaporator.
Blower function to reduce battery
drain
The climate system's blower functions nor-
mally while the engine is running.
However, when the engine is switched off
(even if the ignition is switched to positions I
or II), the blower control will be automatically
switched off to avoid unnecessary battery
drain.
The following points pertain if the ignition is
on but the engine in not running:
To restart the blower, turn the control
knob to the setting of your choice.
After approximately 2 minutes, the blower
speed will be reduced to avoid battery
drain.
You can reset the blower speed at any time.
Please be aware that the system has been
designed to reduce the blower's speed again
after 2 minutes, until the engine is started.
If the battery becomes drained:
LOW BATTERY, FAN IS REDUCED will
be displayed in the text window in the
instrument panel.
The yellow warning light in the instrument
panel (see page 58) will also light up.
03 Climate
Air distribution
03
96
G027044
Air distribution
The incoming air is distributed through the
ventilation points in the passenger compart-
ment shown above.
G027043
Air vents in the dash
Open
Closed
Horizontal air flow
Vertical air flow
Direct the outer air vents toward the side win-
dows to defrost.
0
G027064
Air vents in the door pillars
Open
Closed
Horizontal air flow
Vertical air flow
Direct the outer air vents toward the side win-
dows to defrost.
03 Climate
Air distribution
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
97
Ventilated front seats*
G030244
Controls for ventilated front seats
The ventilation system consists of fans in the
seats and backrests that draw air through the
seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases
as the air in the passenger compartment
becomes cooler.
The level of ventilation is adjusted on the con-
trol panel on the side of the seat. The fans
can be set to three speeds.
To start seat ventilation:
Press briefly on .
To gradually increase ventilation:
Press briefly on .
For maximum ventilation:
Hold down for approximately 2 sec-
onds.
To gradually decrease ventilation:
Press briefly on .
To switch off ventilation:
Hold down for approximately 2 sec-
onds.
The ventilation can be used at the same time
as seat heating*, for example, to help dry
damp clothing.
NOTE
Seat ventilation cannot be started if
the temperature in the passenger com-
partment is below 41°F (5°C).
Seat ventilation should be used with
caution by people who are sensitive to
drafts. A moderate ventilation level
should be set if the function is used for
extended periods.
03 Climate
Electronic climate control (ECC)
03
98
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Overview
AC – (ON/OFF)
Recirculation/Multifilter with sensor*
Recirculation
AUTO
Air distribution
Passenger compartment temperature
sensor
Defroster windshield and side windows
Rear window and door mirrors defroster
Heated front seats*
Temperature passenger´s side
Temperature driver´s side
Blower
Blower control for rear climate system*
Functions
A/C – ON/OFF
The air conditioning functions only at
temperatures above 32°F (0°C).
While the Defroster function is selected,
the air conditioning is temporarily acti-
vated to dehumidify the air, even if you
have manually switched the air condition-
ing off. This will only function if the blower
is not switched off.
Press the switch to turn the air conditioning
on or off. The "ON" or "OFF" LED will light up
to indicate if the system is switched on or off.
Other functions will still be regulated auto-
matically (if the AUTO switch is on).
Interior air quality sensor*
Some vehicles are equipped with a multifilter
and air quality sensor. The filter separates
gases and particles, thereby reducing the
amounts of odors and contaminants entering
the vehicle. The air quality sensor detects
increased levels of contaminants in the out-
side air. When the air quality sensor detects
03 Climate
Electronic climate control (ECC)
03
}}
99
contaminated outside air, the air intake closes
and the air inside the passenger compart-
ment is recirculated, i.e. no outside air enters
the vehicle. The filter also cleans recirculated
passenger compartment air.
When the ECC system is in the AUTO mode,
the green LED will be on.
Recirculation
Press this switch to engage the recirculation
function (air in the passenger compartment
recirculates – no fresh air enters the compart-
ment). The LED in the switch will light up to
indicate that the function is engaged.
Use this function if the outside air is con-
taminated with exhaust gases, smoke,
etc or to heat/cool the vehicle quickly.
Recirculation should not be used for more
than 15 minutes. If your windows begin to
fog or mist, make sure that the recircula-
tion function is switched off.
Selecting Defroster automatically
switches recirculation off.
Timer mode activation: (Vehicles equip-
ped with the Interior Air Quality system
have no timer mode) Press and hold the
recirculation button for at least 3 seconds
to activate a recirculation timer mode.
The amber LED in the recirculation button
will flash 5 times to show that the timer
mode is being activated. In timer mode,
each time the recirculation button is
pressed, the climate control system will
recirculate the air in the passenger com-
partment for 5 – 12 minutes, depending
on the outside air temperature, and then
revert back to fresh air.
Timer mode deactivation: Press and hold
the recirculation button for 3 seconds.
The amber LED in the recirculation button
will illuminate steadily for 5 seconds to
show a return to "normal" mode.
In normal mode, when the recirculation
button is pressed, the climate control
system will recirculate the air in the pas-
senger compartment until the recircula-
tion button is pressed again.
Timer mode memory: If the vehicle is
turned off while timer mode is active,
timer mode will still be active when the
vehicle is restarted.
AUTO
This function automatically regulates the
Electronic Climate Control system so that the
selected temperatures are maintained. The
blower, heating, air distribution (air flow), air
conditioning, and optional air quality sensor
are controlled. If you prefer to manually set
any of these functions, the remaining func-
tions will still be controlled automatically.
Pressing the AUTO button overrides any set-
tings that were previously made manually.
Air distribution
G027267
Air flow to windows
Air through panel vents
Air through floor vents
Press AUTO to automatically regulate air flow
or press any combination of the controls
shown in the illustration to manually adjust air
flow. An LED in the switch will light up if an air
flow control has been pressed.
Passenger compartment
temperature sensor
Measures the temperature in the compart-
ment.
Defroster
This function defrosts/deices the windshield
and front side windows. The LED in the
03 Climate
Electronic climate control (ECC)
03
100
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
switch will light up to indicate that the defrost
function is engaged.
Blower speed increases automatically
and the air conditioning will switch on (if
not already on and if the passenger com-
partment blower is not turned off) to
dehumidify the air in the passenger com-
partment.
Recirculation will not function while
defrost is engaged.
The climate system will return to its previous
settings when the defroster function is
switched off.
Rear window and door mirror
defrosters
This function defrosts/deices the rear window
and door mirrors. The LED in the switch will
light up to indicate that the heating function is
engaged. For additional information on this
function see page 75.
Never use ice scrapers made of metal as they
can easily scratch the mirror surface.
Heated front seats*
1. Press the switch once for maximum seat
heating. Both LEDs in the switch will be
lit.
2. Press the switch a second time for com-
fort heating. One LED in the switch will be
lit.
3. Press the switch a third time to turn the
heating off completely. The LED will go
off.
The seat heating for the passenger seat
should be switched off when the seat is not
occupied.
Heated rear seats (XC90 Executive*)
G030976
Button for rear seat heating
Heating for the respective outboard rear
seats can be switched on or off with buttons
on either side of the center console (see the
illustration).
To switch on rear seat heating:
Press the button.
> The symbol in the button will illumi-
nate.
To switch off rear seat heating:
Press the button.
> The symbol in the button will go out.
Temperature
These controls are used to individually set the
temperature for both sides of the passenger
compartment. Please note that the compart-
ment will not be heated or cooled faster by
setting the temperature higher or lower than
necessary.
Set the control to the temperature you prefer.
Blower control
1
Turn the control clockwise to increase or
counterclockwise to decrease the blower
speed. Pressing the AUTO switch will auto-
matically regulate blower speed and override
manual adjustment.
Turning the blower control counterclockwise
until an orange LED comes on will turn both
the blower and the air conditioning off.
1
See also see page 94.
03 Climate
Electronic climate control (ECC)
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
101
Blower control for rear climate
system*
Turn the control to increase or decrease
blower speed.
Operation
Press to operate the air quality sensor (nor-
mal setting).
or:
Select one of the following three functions by
pressing 1, 2 or 3 times.
1. The AUT LED lights. The air quality sen-
sor is now activated.
2. No LED lights. Recirculation is not acti-
vated unless needed to cool the passen-
ger compartment in a warm climate.
3. The MAN LED lights. Recirculation is now
activated.
Keep in mind the following:
Make it a rule to have the air quality sen-
sor activated at all times.
Recirculation is limited in cold climates to
avoid fogging.
If window fogging occurs, you should
deactivate the air quality sensor. Also use
the defroster functions for the windshield,
side windows and rear window, see
page 98.
The filter should be changed at the inter-
vals recommended in the service sched-
ule. However, if the vehicle is used in a
severely contaminated environment, it
may be necessary to change the filter
more frequently.
102
Front seats............................................................................................ 104
Rear seats............................................................................................. 108
Interior lighting...................................................................................... 111
Storage compartments......................................................................... 114
Securing cargo...................................................................................... 119
I N T E R I O R
04 Interior
Front seats
04
104
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Manually adjusted front seats
G027214
Front-rear adjustment: lift the bar and
move the seat to the position of your
choice.
Raise/lower the front edge of the seat
cushion*: use the control to pump the
front edge of the cushion up or down.
Raise/lower seat height: pump the seat
up or down.
Lumbar support: turn the control for
firmer or softer lumbar support.
Backrest tilt: turn the control to adjust the
angle of the backrest.
Control panel for optional power seat (see
page 105 for more information).
WARNING
Do not adjust the seat while driving.
The seat should be adjusted so that
the brake pedal can be depressed
fully. In addition, position the seat as
far rearward as comfort and control
allow.
Check that the seat is securely locked
into position after adjusting.
Folding the backrests in the front
seat*
G014805
The front passenger seat backrest can be
folded to a horizontal position to make room
for a long load. Fold the backrest as follows:
1. Move the seat as far back as possible.
2. Adjust the backrest to the upright posi-
tion.
3. Lift the catches on the rear of the back-
rest.
4. Without releasing the catches, push the
backrest forward.
5. Move the seat as far forward as possible
so that the head restraint slides under the
glove compartment.
WARNING
When transporting long objects, cover
sharp edges on the load to help pre-
vent injury to occupants. Secure the
load to help prevent shifting during
sudden stops.
When the seat's backrest is returned
to the upright position, push and pull it
to be sure that it is securely locked in
this position.
04 Interior
Front seats
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
105
Power seat*
Operation
Driver's seat: The seat can be adjusted if the
ignition key is in position I, II or if the engine
is running. It can also be adjusted as follows
with the ignition off:
Within several minutes after the driver's
door has been unlocked from the outside,
has been opened, and remains open.
Within a short period if the driver's door
has just been closed.
Within a short period if the driver's door
has not been opened after the ignition
has been switched off.
Passenger seat: The seat can only be
adjusted if the ignition key is in position I, II or
if the engine is running.
G027036
Power seat adjustment controls
Seat adjustment
Adjust the power seat(s) with the two controls
at the side of the seat as follows:
Front edge of seat (raise/lower)
Forward – rearward
Rear edge of seat (raise/lower)
Backrest tilt
NOTE
The power seats have an overload protec-
tor that activates if a seat is blocked by
any object. If this occurs, switch off the
ignition (key in position 0 ) and wait for a
short period before operating the seat
again.
Emergency stop
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press
any of the buttons to stop the seat.
NOTE
Please refer to the following page for infor-
mation on programming the memory func-
tion in the driver's seat.
Remote keyless entry system and the
driver's seat
The remote key transmitter also controls the
position of the electrically operated driver's
seat in the following way:
Adjust the seat to your preferences.
When you leave your vehicle, lock it using
the remote key.
The position of the seat is now stored in the
remote key.
04 Interior
Front seats
04
106
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Automatic seat adjustment
To move the seat to the position in which you
left it:
1. Unlock the driver's door with the same
remote key (the one used to lock the
doors)
2. Open the driver's door within 2 minutes.
The driver's seat will automatically move to
the position in which you left it.
NOTE
The seat will move to this position
even if someone else has moved it to a
different seating position and locked
the vehicle with a different remote key.
This feature will work in the same way
with all of the remote key transmitters
(up to 3 ) that you use with your vehi-
cle.
This feature will not function if you lock
your vehicle with the key.
WARNING
Because the driver's seat can be
adjusted with the ignition off, children
should never be left unattended in the
vehicle.
Movement of the seat can be STOP-
PED at any time by pressing any but-
ton on the power seat control panel.
Do not adjust the seat while driving.
The seat should be adjusted so that
the brake pedal can be depressed
fully. In addition, position the seat as
far rearward as comfort and control
allow.
The seat rails on the floor must not be
obstructed in any way when the seat is
in motion.
G027037
Programming the memory
Three different seating and door mirror posi-
tions can be stored in the driver seat's mem-
ory.
The following example explains how button 1
can be programmed. Buttons 2 and 3 can be
programmed in the same way.
To program (store) a seat position in button 1:
1. Move the seat to the desired position
using the seat adjustment controls (see
page 104).
2. Press and hold down the MEM (memory)
button.
04 Interior
Front seats
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
107
3. With the MEM button depressed, press
button 1 briefly to store the seat's current
position.
To move the seat to the position that it was in
when button 1 was programmed:
Press and hold down button 1 until the seat
stops moving.
As a safety precaution, the seat will stop
automatically if the button is released before
the seat has reached the preset position.
Front seats*
G030180
Massage
Lumbar support
Massage
G030183
Massage control
Firm massage
Gentle massage
Each front seat has a massage function in its
backrest. The massage action is done with air
cushions, which can be adjusted to a firm or
gentle setting. When the setting has been
made, the massaging action is carried out in
cycles as follows: massage 6 minutes –
pause 4 minutes – massage 6 minutes, etc.
When the button is in the center position or if
the ignition is in position 0, the massage func-
tion is switched off.
Lumbar support
G030229
Lumbar support control
The lumbar support uses the same air cush-
ions as the massage function. The button can
be used to adjust the amount of support in
four directions, as shown in the illustration.
Lumbar support can be only be adjusted
when the massage function is switched off.
A memory function stores the lumbar support
setting and this support will resume after the
massage function has been switched off or
after the vehicle has been parked for an
extended period of time.
04 Interior
Rear seats
04
108
Entering the third row of seats
G027027
Tilting the outboard backrests in the
second row of seats:
Pull up the handle (1), hold it up, and tilt
the backrest forward to move the seat.
Return the backrest to the upright posi-
tion to slide the seat back to its original
position.
Forward/rearward seat adjustment
Lift the adjustment bar (2) to move the seat
forward or rearward.
Removing the center console
1
G028445
In order to make it possible to move the cen-
ter seat in the second row of seats as far for-
ward as possible (seven-seat models only),
the rear section of the center console can be
removed.
Pull the handle (see illustration) and lift
out the console.
To return the console to its original posi-
tion, slide it back into position until it
clicks into place.
G027033
Sliding center seat – second row
(seven-seat models only)
The center seat in the second row can be
moved farther forward than the outboard
seats. This makes it possible for a child
seated in this position to sit closer to the peo-
ple in the front seats.
1
The center console cannot be removed on vehicles equipped with the optional Rear Seat Entertainment System.
04 Interior
Rear seats
04
109
G027015
Head restraint – second row, center
position
The head restraint in the center position can
be adjusted to 4 different heights.
To raise – pull the restraint up until it clicks
into one of the four heights positions.
To lower – press the button at the base of
the support (see illustration) and press the
head restraint down carefully.
WARNING
The center rear seat head restraint should
only be in its lowest position when this
seat is NOT occupied. When the center
position is occupied, the head restraint
should be correctly adjusted to the pas-
senger’s height. The upper edge of the
head restraint should be at least on a level
with the upper-most point of the seat
occupant's ear.
G027022
Folding the backrests – second row of
seats
CAUTION
To help avoid damage to the upholstery,
there should be no objects on the rear seat
and the seat belt should not be buckled
when the backrest is folded down.
1. Move the seat(s) to their rearmost posi-
tion (seven-seat models only).
2. Pull the loop to fold down an outboard
head restraint. Press down the center
head restraint if necessary (see
page 109).
04 Interior
Rear seats
04
110
3. Pull the handle (1) outward to release the
backrest. The backrests are designed to
lock at a 45 degree angle. Pull the handle
again to continue pressing it down until it
locks in the horizontal position.
To return the backrests to the upright posi-
tion, pull handle 1 and pull the backrest up.
G027016
Folding the backrests—third row of
seats
Folding down the backrest
If necessary, fold in the load anchorage eye-
lets before folding down the backrests.
1. Move the seats in the second row as far
forward as possible, see page 108.
2. Pull up the handle (see illustration 1).
3. Push the seat cushion firmly rearward,
under the backrest (see illustration 2).
4.
Fold down the backrests
2
(the head
restraints fold down automatically) to the
horizontal position.
WARNING
The seats in the third row are not equipped
with top tether anchors or ISOFIX/LATCH
lower child seat anchors. Child restraint
systems should never be used on these
seats.
Returning the backrest to the upright
position
1. Fold up the backrest to the upright posi-
tion.
2. Grasp the strap (see illustration 3) and
pull the seat cushion out until it locks in
place. This also locks the backrest in the
upright position.
WARNING
When one or more sections of the
backrest is returned to the upright
position, check that it is properly
locked in place by pushing and pulling
it. The red indicators should also not
be visible.
Return the outboard head restraints to
the upright position.
Long loads should always be securely
anchored to help avoid injury in the
event of a sudden stop.
Always turn the engine off and apply
the parking brake when loading/
unloading the vehicle.
Place the transmission in the Park (P)
position to help prevent inadvertent
movement of the gear selector.
On hot days, the temperature in the
vehicle interior can rise very quickly.
Exposure of people to these high tem-
peratures for even a short period of
time can cause heat-related injury or
death. Small children are particularly at
risk.
2
Please note that the head restraints in this row cannot be vertically adjusted.
04 Interior
Interior lighting
04
}}
111
Reading lights and courtesy light
G026960
Driver's side front reading lamp
Courtesy lights
Passenger's side front reading lamp The
reading lights can be switched on or off
by pressing buttons 1 or 3. The courtesy
lighting (including footwell lighting) can be
turned on or off by pressing button 2.
This also activates the automatic func-
tion.
G027153
Rear reading lights
Driver's side rear reading light
Passenger's side rear reading light. The
rear reading lights can be switched on
and off by pressing buttons (4) or (5).
Automatic function
The reading lights and courtesy lights will
switch off automatically approximately
10 minutes after the engine has been turned
off. The lights can be turned off sooner by
pressing the respective buttons.
The courtesy lights come on automatically
1
and remain on for approximately 30 seconds
when:
The vehicle has been unlocked from the
outside with the remote key or key blade
If the engine has been switched off and
the ignition key has been turned to posi-
tion 0
The courtesy lights will come on and remain
on for approximately 10 minutes when:
One of the doors is opened (assuming the
courtesy lighting has not previously been
switched off)
The courtesy lighting will go off when:
The engine is started
The vehicle is locked from the outside
with the remote key or key blade
The automatic function can be disconnected
by pressing button (2) for more than 3 sec-
onds.
Briefly pressing the button again automati-
cally reconnects the function.
The courtesy light timer periods can be
changed. Contact a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
1
This function is light dependent and is only activated in dark conditions.
04 Interior
Interior lighting
04
112
Vanity mirror
G027045
The light comes on when you open the cover.
Glove compartment lighting
The light in the glove compartment comes on
or switches off when its door is opened or
closed.
04 Interior
Interior lighting
04
113
04 Interior
Storage compartments
04
114
04 Interior
Storage compartments
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
115
Storage compartment in third row of
seats
Storage compartment
Glove compartment
Storage compartment in center console
Rear seat cup holders
Storage pocket (also in front edge of front
seats)
Grocery bag holder*
WARNING
Make sure that no hard, sharp or heavy
objects lie on or in any of the storage
areas where they might cause injury during
sudden braking.
Storage compartment in the center
console
G027019
To open the lid on the storage compartment,
press the lower edge of the opening latch
(see illustration above). This lid can be folded
back to form a small table area for rear seat
passengers.
Lift the tray under the lid to expose the deep
storage bin with slots for CD storage.
G027020
Cup holders for the front seats
Two cup holders are provided for the front
seat occupants. Press lightly on the rear edge
of the cover to open it.
Ashtray (accessory)
An ashtray insert is available from your Volvo
retailer. This insert slides into either of the
cup holders.
Pen holder
There is a pen holder in the center console, in
front of the gear selector.
04 Interior
Storage compartments
04
116
G027018
Storage compartment in rear side of the
center console
Grasp the upper edge of cover and pull to
open this compartment.
Ashtray (accessory)
An ashtray insert is available from your Volvo
retailer.
G027063
Cup holders for the rear seats
Grasp the lower edge of the panel to pull
out the cup holders in the rear side of the
center console.
The cup holder insert can be removed to
provide space for a large plastic bottle.
Pull the insert straight up to remove it.
Press down to reinsert it.
ATTENTION
Pakjdskdl ioiuip kjöpp opoodidåuswi
C
SOUND
MENU
80
ENTER
L
S
E
E
EXIT
MY KEY
R
T
O
AIRBAG
G027025
Glove compartment
The glove compartment can be used to store
things such as the owner's manual, maps,
pens, etc.
04 Interior
Storage compartments
04
117
G027028
Coat hanger
The jacket hanger is located on the inboard
side of the front passenger's seat head
restraint. It is only intended for hanging light
garments.
G027026
Storage space between rear seats
This storage space provides compartments
for pens or other small items.
G027040
Rear side storage compartments and
cup holders (seven-seat models)
Lift the lid to access the storage compart-
ment.
04 Interior
Storage compartments
04
118
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Refrigerator*
G027068
The refrigerator is located under the cover in
the front seat center armrest. Use the button
(see the inset illustration) to adjust the level of
cooling.
The refrigerator functions when the engine is
running or when the ignition is in position II.
WARNING
Bottles kept in the refrigerator should be
firmly sealed and the cover over the refrig-
erator must be securely closed while the
vehicle is in motion.
04 Interior
Securing cargo
04
119
G027031
As a safety precaution, all cargo in your vehi-
cle should be securely anchored to keep it
from being thrown forward in the event of
sudden braking, etc. The vehicle is equipped
with eyelets in the cargo space to which
straps or other cargo restraints can be
attached.
WARNING
The eyelets are not to be used as passen-
ger restraints or as anchorages for child
restraints.
Consult your Volvo retailer about suitable
accessories for this purpose.
Remember that an object weighing 44 lbs
(20 kg) produces a force of 2,200 lbs
(1,000 kg) in a head-on collision at 30 mph
(50 km/h)!
Keep the following in mind when loading
the vehicle:
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle
is determined by factors such as the
number of passengers, the amount of
cargo, the weight of any accessories that
may be installed, etc. See the section
"Vehicle loading" in the chapter "Wheel
and tires" for more detailed information.
Load the cargo against the backrest.
Load heavy cargo as low as possible.
If no one is sitting in the outboard rear
seat(s), reinforce the backrest by fasten-
ing the seat belts.
Never load cargo above the backrest
without a cargo net.
WARNING
When the rear backrest(s) are folded
down, the vehicle should not be loaded to
a level higher than 2 in. (5 cm) below the
upper edge of the rear side windows.
Objects placed higher than this level could
impede the function of the inflatable cur-
tain.
G027058
Attachment bracket
Nylon cargo net (accessory)
The Volvo XC90 can be equipped with a
cargo net made of strong nylon fabric.
This net can be installed in two places:
Behind the rear seat backrests (the sec-
ond row of seats)
Behind the front seat backrests if the rear
seat backrests (the second row of seats)
have been folded down.
04 Interior
Securing cargo
04
120
Attachment eyelet in front seat rail
If the vehicle is equipped with the cargo area
cover, lift the cover out of the vehicle before
installing the cargo net.
1. The upper and lower rods of the cargo
net are hinged. Position the rods so that
they are straight and lock in position.
2. Insert the end of the upper rod in one of
the attachment brackets (see illustration
in the left column).
3. Insert the other end of the rod in the
attachment bracket on the opposite side
of the vehicle.
NOTE
When using the net in the rear attachment
brackets, be sure it is installed in front of
the side armrests.
4. Attach the lower straps to the eyelets on
the floor if the net has been installed in
the rear attachment brackets. Use the
eyelets in the front seat rails if the net has
been installed in the forward attachment
brackets.
5. Adjust the straps to pull the net taut.
Folding and storing the cargo net
Press the release buttons on the hinges (1 in
the illustration) and fold the net.
WARNING
Be sure the cargo net is properly
inserted in the attachment brackets
and the straps are correctly attached
to the eyelets and pulled taut.
Do not use the net if it is damaged in
any way.
When it is not in use, store the net so
that it cannot be thrown forward in the
event of sudden braking, etc.
G027056
Upper attachments
04 Interior
Securing cargo
04
121
Steel grid (accessory)
Installing the grid, upper attachments
1. Lift in the grid through the tailgate or
through one of the rear passenger doors
(in this case, fold down the rear seat
backrests/backrests in second row of
seats in seven-seat models).
2. Insert one of the grid's upper attach-
ments into an attachment bracket above
one of the rear passenger doors (see
illustration above).
3. Push the grid's attachment into the for-
ward position in the attachment bracket
(see inset illustration above) to lock the
attachment in place.
G027057
Lower attachments
4. Insert the grid's other upper attachment
in the attachment bracket above the
opposite rear passenger door, and press
the attachment into the forward position
in the attachment bracket to lock it in
place.
Installing the grid, lower attachments
1. Insert the lower attachment bracket
through the steel grid's lower mount from
underneath.
2. Install the spring on the attachment
bracket and tighten the knob.
3. Secure the attachment bracket hook in
the lower cargo eyelet. Turn the knob to
tension the attachment bracket in the
cargo eyelet.
4. Repeat the operation on the opposite
side.
5. Tighten both attachment brackets alter-
natively.
6. Place the protective caps on the threads
above the knobs.
WARNING
The backrests of the third row seats
must be folded down when installing
the steel grid.
The steel grid is installed behind the
second row of seats. To avoid the risk
of injury, no one should be allowed to
sit in the third row of seats when the
steel grid is in place in the vehicle.
04 Interior
Securing cargo
04
122
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G027055
Cargo area cover*
Installing the cargo area cover:
1. Press the end pieces of the cargo area
cover down in the holders.
2. Pull out the cargo area cover and hook it
in the holes in the rear cargo area pillars
(see illustration above).
Removing the cargo area cover:
1. Press the end pieces of the cover inward.
2. Pull up and lift out.
Grocery bag holder
1. Fold down the lower section of the tail-
gate.
2. Fold up the rear section of the cargo
compartment floor.
3. Hang or secure your grocery bags by
means of the straps or holders.
04 Interior
04
123
124
Remote keys and key blades................................................................ 126
Locking and unlocking.......................................................................... 130
Child safety locks.................................................................................. 132
Alarm..................................................................................................... 133
L O C K S A N D A L A R M
05 Locks and alarm
Remote keys and key blades
05
126
Key blades
Your vehicle is equipped with two coded
remote key transmitters with integrated igni-
tion key blades called Key Integrated Remote
(KIR).
To unlock/lock the vehicle using the key
blade:
1. If necessary, press button (1) to fold out
the key blade.
2. Insert the key blade in the driver's door
lock and turn it once to unlock the driv-
er's door only.
3. Turn the key blade again (within 10 sec-
onds) to unlock all doors and the tailgate.
4. Turn the key blade once in the opposite
direction to lock all doors and the tailgate.
Use the switch on the driver's door armrest to
lock/unlock the vehicle from the inside.
WARNING
If the doors are locked while driving, this
may hinder rapid access to the occupants
of the vehicle in the event of an accident.
(Also see information on "Child safety
locks".)
NOTE
To help prevent accidentally locking the
keys in the vehicle, the central locking sys-
tem is designed to unlock the doors imme-
diately if the key is left in the ignition
switch, the vehicle is locked using the lock
button on the door and the door is then
closed. A sound from the lock will be audi-
ble at this time.
Please note that this function will not
unlock the doors if the engine is running.
Immobilizer (start inhibitor)
Each of the keys supplied with your vehicle
contains a coded transmitter. The code in the
key is transmitted to an antenna in the igni-
tion switch where it is compared to the code
stored in the start inhibitor module. The vehi-
cle will start only with a properly coded key.
Each key has a unique code, which your
Volvo retailer uses if new keys are required. A
maximum of six remote keys can be pro-
grammed and used for one vehicle.
If you misplace a key, take the other keys to
an authorized Volvo retailer for reprogram-
ming as an antitheft measure.
If two of the keys to your vehicle are close
together, e.g., on the same key ring, when
you try to start the vehicle, this could cause
interference in the immobilizer system and
result in the vehicle not starting. If this should
occur, remove one of the keys from the key
ring before trying to start the vehicle again.
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing condition: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
05 Locks and alarm
Remote keys and key blades
05
127
Remote keys
G026963
Your vehicle is equipped with two coded
remote key transmitters with integrated igni-
tion keys called Key Integrated Remote (KIR).
The remote key transmitters will also activate
or allow "keyless" entry into the passenger
compartment or the tailgate. These transmit-
ters use a radio frequency that will enable you
to lock/unlock all doors and the tailgate from
a distance of 10 – 15 feet (3 – 5 meters). They
will also activate or deactivate your vehicle's
alarm system(s). The vehicle can also be
locked/unlocked with the key.
If either of the remote keys is lost, the other
should be taken with the car to a Volvo
retailer. As an anti-theft measure, the code of
the lost remote key must be erased from the
system.
NOTE
Additional or duplicate remote control keys
can be obtained from any Authorized
Volvo Retailer.
You can also obtain additional or duplicate
remote control keys from certain inde-
pendent repair facilities and locksmiths
that are qualified to make remote control
keys. Each key must be programmed to
work with your vehicle.
California Only:
A list of independent repair facilities and/or
locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut
and code replacement keys can be found:
on the Volvo website at
http://www.volvocars.com/us/keys
by calling Volvo Customer Care at
1-800-458-1552
G027013
Unlock
Unlock tailgate
"Panic" function
Approach lighting
Lock
Fold key blade in/out
Using the remote key
Unlock
Press this button once to unlock the driver's
door only. Wait for at least 1 second and
05 Locks and alarm
Remote keys and key blades
05
128
press the button again (within 10 seconds) to
unlock all doors, and the tailgate.
Tailgate unlock
Press this button to unlock the tailgate (with-
out unlocking the other doors). This function
will not open the tailgate.
Panic function
For more information on this function, see
page 133.
Approach lighting
Press this button when approaching the vehi-
cle at night to light up the interior courtesy
light, parking lights, license plate lights and
the lights in the door mirrors.
Lock
Press once to lock all doors, and the tailgate.
Fold key blade in/out
Press to extend the key blade. This button
must also be pressed when the key blade is
folded back into the slot in the side of the
remote key unit.
NOTE
If an airbag deploys, your vehicle's
SRS control module will attempt to
automatically unlock all doors.
The key blade may also be used to
lock and unlock the doors, and to acti-
vate and deactivate the alarm system.
To avoid leaving your keys in the vehi-
cle, make a habit of always locking the
vehicle with the remote key.
If the key blade section of the remote
is not fully folded out when starting the
vehicle, the immobilizer function may
make it impossible to start the engine.
The vehicle can be locked even if a
door is open. When the door(s) are
closed, they will be locked. Please be
aware that the keys could be locked in
the car when this is done.
Automatic re-locking
If the doors are unlocked, the locks will auto-
matically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will
rearm after 2 minutes unless a door or the
tailgate has been opened. This helps prevent
the car from inadvertently being left unlocked.
FCC ID: LQNP2T-APU
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules. Operation is subject to the following
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
Canadian 2306104388
Model 504 2927 by Donnelly
Operation is subject to the following condi-
tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Canadian 2306104388A
Model 509 977 by Connaught Electronics
Operation is subject to the following condi-
tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
05 Locks and alarm
Remote keys and key blades
05
129
WARNING
Never use the transmitter to lock the doors
from inside the vehicle.
Doing so would ACTIVATE:
the break-in alarm, which would sound
if one of the doors were opened
the optional interior motion and incli-
nation alarm sensors.
Doing so would DEACTIVATE:
the moonroof and interior courtesy
light controls.
the central locking buttons on the front
door armrests, although the interior
door handles would still function to
allow occupants to leave the vehicle.
Disabled features would remain disa-
bled until the remote is used again to
unlock the vehicle.
In addition, locking an occupied vehi-
cle would hinder rapid access to the
occupants in an accident or emer-
gency.
Replacing the battery in the remote key
If the range of the transmitter is noticeably
reduced, this indicates that the battery is
weak and should be replaced.
To replace the battery:
1. Carefully pry open the rear edge of the
cover with a small screwdriver.
2. Insert a new 3-volt, CR2032 battery, with
the battery's plus side up. Avoid touching
the contact surfaces of the battery with
your fingers.
3. Press the cover back into place. Ensure
that the rubber seal is correctly posi-
tioned to help keep out moisture.
NOTE
The old battery should be disposed of
properly at a recycling center or at your
Volvo retailer.
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
05
130
G029646
Locking and unlocking the vehicle from
the inside
The switch on the driver's door armrest can
be used to lock or unlock all doors and the
tailgate, and to set the alarm.
Each door can also be locked with the lock
button on the respective door and opened by
pulling the door handle on the door.
Alternative locking when parking
The central locking button on the driver's
door can also be used to lock the vehicle
when you leave it. To do so:
1. Open the door.
2. Press the lock section of the button.
3. Close the door. This will lock the vehicle
completely and arm the alarm.
NOTE
Please be aware that locking the vehicle in
this way makes it possible to lock the
remote key in the passenger compartment.
To help avoid this, lock the vehicle from
the outside by pressing the lock button on
the remote key.
If the vehicle is locked using the central
locking button, be sure that the remote key
is in your possession before closing the
door.
Automatic locking
The function locks the doors automatically
when the vehicle's speed exceeds approxi-
mately 5 mph (7 km/h). The doors will then
remain locked until a door in opened from the
inside or if all of the doors are unlocked from
the control panel in the driver's door.
This function can be activated/deactivated
from the control panel in the driver's door.
Activating/deactivating automatic
locking
1. Turn the ignition key to position I or II.
2. Press the READ button on the left-side
steering wheel lever to erase any mes-
sages that may be displayed in the infor-
mation display.
3. Depress the central locking button on the
control panel until a new message about
the locking status is displayed.
The message
AUTOLOCK ON (the doors will
be locked when the vehicle begins to move)
or AUTOLOCK OFF will be displayed.
ATTENTION
Pakjdskdl ioiuip kjöpp opoodidåuswi
C
SOUND
MENU
80
ENTER
L
S
E
E
EXIT
MY KEY
R
T
O
AIRBAG
G027025
Locking the glove compartment
The glove compartment can be locked with
the master key.
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
05
131
G028485
Unlocking the tailgate
The tailgate lock is incorporated in the central
locking system and is locked or unlocked
when all doors are locked/unlocked.
The tailgate can be unlocked by:
Pressing UNLOCK on the remote key
twice.
Using the central locking button on the
driver's door.
Pressing the remote key's tailgate unlock
button (see the illustration).
Relock the tailgate using the remote's
LOCK button.
Automatic relocking
If you use the tailgate unlock button to unlock
the tailgate without opening it, it will automat-
ically relock after approximately 2 minutes.
NOTE
If you open the tailgate and close it again,
it will remain unlocked and the alarm will
not be rearmed. Press the lock button on
the remote key to relock the tailgate and
rearm the alarm.
05 Locks and alarm
Child safety locks
05
132
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G021513
Child safety locks in the rear doors - driver's side
and passenger's side respectively
Manual child safety locks – rear doors
The controls are located on the rear door
jambs. Use a key or small screwdriver to
adjust these controls.
Turn outward: the door cannot be
opened from the inside. The door can be
opened from the outside.
Turn inward: the door locks function
normally (the door can be opened from
the inside).
WARNING
Remember, in the event of an accident,
the rear seat passengers cannot open the
doors from the inside with the buttons in
position A.
REAR
AC
G027105
Power child locks*
To prevent the rear doors from being opened
from the inside:
1. Turn the vehicle's ignition key to at least
position I or II.
2. Press the button in the center console
(see the illustration).
Indicator light in the button ON: the rear
doors and windows cannot be opened from
the inside.
Indicator light in the button OFF: the rear
doors can be opened from the inside and the
windows can be opened.
A message will appear in the instrument
panel display when the child safety locks are
activated/deactivated.
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
133
The alarm is automatically armed whenever
you lock your vehicle.
When armed, the alarm continuously moni-
tors a number of points on the vehicle. The
following conditions will set off the alarm:
The hood is forced open.
The tailgate is forced open.
A door is forced open.
The ignition switch is tampered with.
If there is movement in the passenger
compartment (if the vehicle is equipped
with the optional movement sensor).
The vehicle is lifted or towed (if the vehi-
cle is equipped with the optional inclina-
tion sensor).
The battery is disconnected (while the
alarm is armed).
The siren is disconnected when the alarm
is disarmed.
Arming the alarm
1. Press the LOCK button on the remote
key.
2. Lock the vehicle using the key blade in
the driver's door or press the central lock
button on the driver's door with the door
open.
One long flash of the turn signals will confirm
that the alarm is armed.
Movement sensor*
In addition to triggering the alarm if there is
movement in the passenger compartment,
currents of air may also affect the movement
sensor. This means that locking the vehicle
with the windows or the moonroof open, or
using an accessory portable passenger com-
partment heater, could trigger the alarm.
To help avoid this, close the windows and
moonroof before locking the vehicle. If a pas-
senger compartment heater is used when the
vehicle is locked, direct airflow from the heat-
er's vent(s) so that it isn't directed upward in
the passenger compartment.
Disarming the alarm
Press the UNLOCK button on the remote key
or unlock the doors with the key blade.
Turning off (stopping) the alarm
If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped by
pressing the UNLOCK button on the remote
key or by unlocking the driver's door with the
key blade.
Visual alarm signal
The visual alarm signal is given by flashing all
turn signals and turning on the interior lighting
for approximately 5 minutes.
Audible alarm signal
An audible alarm signal is given by a battery
powered siren. One alarm cycle lasts for
25 seconds.
"Panic" button
In an emergency situation, this feature can be
used to attract attention.
Activate the "panic" button by pressing the
red button on the remote key ( see page 127
for illustration) for at least 3 seconds or by
pressing this button twice within 3 seconds.
The turn signals will flash, and the vehicle's
horn will sound.
The function can be turned off by pressing
any of the buttons on the remote key or will
stop automatically after 25 seconds. When a
button is pressed, there is a 5 second delay
before the panic alarm is deactivated.
NOTE
This button will NOT unlock the vehicle.
LED alarm status signals
The status of the alarm system is indicated by
the red LED at the top of the dash:
LED off – the alarm is not armed
LED flashes once per second – the alarm
is armed
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm
05
134
LED flashes rapidly before the ignition is
switched on – the alarm has been trig-
gered
Fault in the alarm system: If a fault has
been detected in the alarm system, a
message will be displayed in the text win-
dow. Contact a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
Automatic re-lock/re-arm system
If the vehicle is unlocked with the remote, the
vehicle will re-lock and the alarm will re-arm
after 2 minutes unless a door or the tailgate
has been opened.
05 Locks and alarm
05
135
136
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information............................................................................... 138
Fuel requirements................................................................................. 139
Refueling............................................................................................... 141
Starting the vehicle............................................................................... 143
Ignition switch and steering wheel lock................................................ 145
Economical driving................................................................................ 146
Difficult driving conditions..................................................................... 147
Automatic transmission........................................................................ 149
Jump starting........................................................................................ 152
All Wheel Drive*..................................................................................... 153
Brake system........................................................................................ 154
Parking brake........................................................................................ 157
Stability system..................................................................................... 158
Front/rear park assist*........................................................................... 160
Towing.................................................................................................. 162
Towing a trailer...................................................................................... 164
Detachable trailer hitch......................................................................... 167
Load carriers (accessory)...................................................................... 168
Cold weather precautions..................................................................... 169
Before a long distance trip.................................................................... 170
Blind Spot Information System*............................................................ 171
S T A R T I N G A N D D R I V I N G
06 Starting and driving
General information
06
138
Engine oil
Although some oil consumption occurs dur-
ing normal engine operation, more oil is con-
sumed when the engine is new as the internal
parts generate higher friction while wearing-in
to each other. From the time the engine is
new until the first maintenance is performed,
the oil consumption could be higher than nor-
mal. For this reason, it is especially important
to check the oil regularly during this period,
see page 222.
Fuel requirements
Deposit control gasoline (detergent
additives)
Volvo recommends the use of detergent gas-
oline to control engine deposits. Detergent
gasoline is effective in keeping injectors and
intake valves clean. Consistent use of deposit
control gasolines will help ensure good driva-
bility and fuel economy. If you are not sure
whether the gasoline contains deposit control
additives, check with the service station oper-
ator.
NOTE
Volvo does not recommend the use of
external fuel injector cleaning systems.
Unleaded fuel
Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic con-
verter and must use only unleaded gasoline.
U.S. and Canadian regulations require that
pumps delivering unleaded gasoline be label-
led "UNLEADED". Only these pumps have
nozzles which fit your vehicle's filler inlet. It is
unlawful to dispense leaded fuel into a vehicle
labelled "unleaded gasoline only". Leaded
gasoline damages the three-way catalytic
converter and the heated oxygen sensor sys-
tem. Repeated use of leaded gasoline will
lessen the effectiveness of the emission con-
trol system and could result in loss of emis-
sion warranty coverage. State and local vehi-
cle inspection programs will make detection
of misfueling easier, possibly resulting in
emission test failure for misfueled vehicles.
NOTE
Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines con-
tain an octane enhancing additive called
methyl-cyclopentadienyl manganese tri-
carbonyl (MMT). If such fuels are used,
your Emission Control System perform-
ance may be affected, and the Check
Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp)
located on your instrument panel may
light. If this occurs, please return your
vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician for maintenance.
Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers
"Oxygenated fuels"
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing
"oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or
ethers. In some areas, state or local laws
require that the service pump be marked indi-
cating use of alcohols or ethers. However,
there are areas in which the pumps are
unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is
alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy,
check with the service station operator. To
meet seasonal air quality standards, some
areas require the use of "oxygenated" fuel.
Volvo allows the use of the following "oxy-
genated" fuels; however, the octane ratings
listed on page 139 must still be met.
Alcohol – Ethanol: Fuels containing up to
10% ethanol by volume may be used. Ethanol
may also be referred to as Ethyl alcohol, or
"Gasohol".
Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to 15%
MTBE may be used.
06 Starting and driving
Fuel requirements
06
139
Octane rating
Minimum octane
G028920
Typical pump octane label
Volvo recommends premium for best per-
formance, but using 87 octane
1
or above will
not affect engine reliability.
Demanding driving
In demanding driving conditions, such as
operating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a
trailer, or driving for extended periods at
higher altitudes than normal, it may be advis-
able to switch to higher octane fuel (91 or
higher) or to change gasoline brands to fully
utilize your engine's capacity, and for the
smoothest possible operation.
NOTE
When switching to higher octane fuel or
changing gasoline brands, it may be nec-
essary to fill the tank more than once
before a difference in engine operation is
noticeable.
Fuel Formulations
Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a
knock inhibitor, and do not use lead addi-
tives. Besides damaging the exhaust emis-
sion control systems on your vehicle, lead
has been strongly linked to certain forms of
cancer.
Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent.
Unburned benzene has been strongly linked
to certain forms of cancer. If you live in an
area where you must fill your own gas tank,
take precautions. These may include:
standing upwind away from the filler noz-
zle while refueling
refueling only at gas stations with vapor
recovery systems that fully seal the
mouth of the filler neck during refueling
wearing neoprene gloves while handling a
fuel filler nozzle.
Use of Additives
With the exception of gas line antifreeze dur-
ing winter months, do not add solvents, thick-
eners, or other store-bought additives to your
vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems.
Overuse may damage your engine, and some
of these additives contain organically volatile
chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself
to these chemicals.
WARNING
Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, color-
less, and odorless gas. It is present in all
exhaust gases. If you ever smell exhaust
fumes inside the vehicle, make sure the
passenger compartment is ventilated, and
immediately return the vehicle to a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician for
correction.
1
AKI (ANTI KNOCK INDEX) is an average of the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON), MON+RON/2.
06 Starting and driving
Fuel requirements
06
140
WARNING
Driving with the tailgate open: Driving
with the tailgate open could lead to poi-
sonous exhaust gases entering the pas-
senger compartment.
If the tailgate must be kept open for
any reason, proceed as follows:
Close the windows
Set the ventilation system control to air
flow to floor, windshield and side win-
dows and blower control to its highest
setting.
Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers,
"Oxygenated fuels"
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing
"oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or
ethers. In some areas, state or local laws
require that the service pump be marked indi-
cating use of alcohols or ethers. However,
there are areas in which the pumps are
unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is
alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy,
check with the service station operator. To
meet seasonal air quality standards, some
areas require the use of "oxygenated" fuel.
Volvo allows the use of the following "oxy-
genated" fuels; however, the octane ratings
listed on page 139 must still be met.
Alcohol – Ethanol
Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by vol-
ume may be used. Ethanol may also be refer-
red to as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol".
Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to
15% MTBE may be used.
Methanol
Do not use gasolines containing methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice
can result in vehicle performance deteriora-
tion and can damage critical parts in the fuel
system. Such damage may not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Weight distribution affects handling
At the specified curb weight your vehicle has
a tendency to understeer, which means that
the steering wheel has to be turned more
than might seem appropriate for the curva-
ture of a bend.
This ensures good stability and reduces the
risk of rear wheel skid. Remember that these
properties can alter with the vehicle load.
The heavier the load in the cargo area, the
less the tendency to understeer.
Handling, roadholding
Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pres-
sure all affect vehicle handling. Therefore,
check that the tires are inflated to the recom-
mended pressure according to the vehicle
load. See "Tire pressure" section.
Loads should be distributed so that capacity
weight or maximum permissible axle loads
are not exceeded.
Conserving electrical current
Keep the following in mind to help minimize
battery drain:
When the engine is not running, avoid
turning the ignition key to position II (see
page 145). Many electrical systems (the
audio system, the optional infotainment/
navigation systems, power windows, etc)
will function with the ignition key in posi-
tion I. This position reduces drain on the
battery.
Please keep in mind that using systems,
accessories, etc that consume a great
deal of current when the engine is not
running could result in the battery being
completely drained. Driving or having the
engine running for approximately
15 minutes will help keep the battery
charged.
NOTE
A warning message will be displayed in the
text window in the instrument panel when
the battery charge is low.
06 Starting and driving
Refueling
06
141
Fuel filler door
G027073
The fuel filler cap can be placed on the hook on
the fuel filler door while refueling
Press the button on the light switch panel
(see the illustration on page 67) when the
vehicle is at a standstill to unlock the fuel filler
door. Please note that the fuel filler door will
remain unlocked until the vehicle begins to
move forward. An audible click will be heard
when the fuel filler door relocks.
If you intend to leave your vehicle while it is
being refueled, this feature enables you to
lock the doors/tailgate while leaving the fuel
filler door unlocked.
You can also keep the vehicle locked if you
remain inside it during refueling. The central
locking button does not lock the fuel filler
door. Be sure the fuel filler door is not
obstructed and is completely closed after
refueling.
Open the fuel filler cap slowly during hot
weather.
NOTE
During a transitional period, a small num-
ber of service stations may still have fuel
nozzles that are not compatible with the
fuel filler neck on vehicles equipped with
the evaporative control system.
Refueling
The fuel tank is designed to accommodate
possible expansion of the fuel in hot weather.
See page 288 for fuel tank volume. Be aware
that the "usable" tank capacity will be some-
what less than the specified maximum. When
the fuel level is low, such factors as ambient
temperature, the fuel's "Reid vapor pressure"
characteristics, and terrain can affect the fuel
pump's ability to supply the engine with an
adequate supply of fuel. Therefore, it is advis-
able to refuel as soon as possible when the
needle nears the red zone, or when the fuel
warning light comes on.
WARNING
Never carry a cell phone that is switched
on while refueling your vehicle. If the
phone rings, this may cause a spark that
could ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in
fire and injury.
06 Starting and driving
Refueling
06
142
CAUTION
Do not refuel with the engine running
1
.
Turn the ignition off or to position I. If
the ignition is on, an incorrect reading
could occur in the fuel gauge.
After refueling, close the fuel filler cap
by turning it clockwise until it clicks
into place
1
.
Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not
press the handle on the filler nozzle
more than one extra time. Too much
fuel in the tank in hot weather condi-
tions can cause the fuel to overflow.
Overfilling could also cause damage to
the emission control systems.
Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling.
In addition to causing damage to the
environment, gasolines containing
alcohol can cause damage to painted
surfaces, which may not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
Do not use gasolines containing meth-
anol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol).
This practice can result in vehicle per-
formance deterioration and can dam-
age critical parts in the fuel system.
Such damage may not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
1
If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle's
performance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.
06 Starting and driving
Starting the vehicle
06
143
Starting the engine
WARNING
Before starting, check that the seat, steer-
ing wheel and mirrors are adjusted prop-
erly. Make sure the brake pedal can be
depressed completely. Adjust the seat if
necessary, see page 104.
1. Fasten the seat belt.
2. Apply the parking brake (hand brake) if
not already set. The gear selector is
locked in the P position (SHIFTLOCK).
3. Without touching the accelerator pedal,
turn the ignition key
1
to the starting posi-
tion. Allow the starter to operate for up to
10 seconds. Release the key as soon as
the engine starts
2
. If the engine fails to
start, repeat this step.
CAUTION
If the engine does not start after the third
try, wait for approximately 3 minutes
before trying to start it again to give the
battery time to recover its starting
capacity.
WARNING
Never use more than one floor mat at
a time on the driver's floor. An extra
mat on the driver's floor can cause the
accelerator and/or brake pedal to
catch. Check that the movement of
these pedals is not impeded.
Volvo's floor mats are specially manu-
factured for your car. They must be
firmly secured in the clips on the floor
so that they cannot slide and become
trapped under the pedals on the driv-
er's side.
NOTE
If the key blade section of the remote
is not fully folded out when starting the
vehicle, the immobilizer function may
make it impossible to start the engine.
After a cold start, idle speed may be
noticeably higher than normal for a
short period. This is done to help bring
components in the emission control
system to their normal operating tem-
perature as quickly as possible, which
enables them to control emissions and
help reduce the vehicle's impact on
the environment.
To release the gear selector from the P
(Park) position, the engine must be
running (or the ignition key must be in
position II) and the brake pedal must
be depressed.
Select the desired gear. The gear
engages after a very slight delay which
is especially noticeable when selecting
R.
1
If two of the keys to your vehicle are close together, e.g. on the same key ring when you try to start the vehicle, this could cause interference in the immobilizer system and result in the vehicle not
starting. If this should occur, remove one of the keys from the key ring before trying to start the vehicle again.
2
On vehicles equipped with the autostart feature, release the key immediately. See also page 145.
06 Starting and driving
Starting the vehicle
06
144
NOTE
Your vehicle is equipped with a KEYLOCK
system. When the engine is switched off,
the gear selector must be in the P position
before the key can be removed from the
ignition switch.
When starting in cold weather, the trans-
mission may shift up at slightly higher
engine speeds than normal until the auto-
matic transmission fluid reaches normal
operating temperature.
NOTE
Do not race a cold engine immediately
after starting. Oil flow may not reach some
lubrication points fast enough to prevent
engine damage.
WARNING
Always place the gear selector in Park and
apply the parking brake before leaving the
vehicle. Never leave the vehicle unatten-
ded with the engine running.
Always open garage doors fully before
starting the engine inside a garage to
ensure adequate ventilation. The
exhaust gases contain carbon monox-
ide, which is invisible and odorless but
very poisonous.
CAUTION
Automatic transmission
The engine should be idling when you
move the gear selector. Never acceler-
ate until after you feel the transmission
engage! Accelerating immediately after
selecting a gear will cause harsh
engagement and premature transmis-
sion wear.
Selecting P or N when idling at a
standstill for prolonged periods of time
will help prevent overheating of the
automatic transmission fluid.
06 Starting and driving
Ignition switch and steering wheel lock
06
145
Ignition switch and steering wheel
lock
0 – Locked position:
Remove the key to lock
the steering wheel
A
.
I – Intermediate posi-
tion
B
– "radio position":
Certain accessories,
radio, etc. on, daytime
running lights off.
II – Drive position: The
key position when driv-
ing. The vehicle's entire
electrical system is con-
nected.
III – Start position:
Release the key when
the engine starts. The
key returns automatically
to the Drive position.
A chime will sound if the key is left in the
ignition and the driver's door is opened.
A
The gear selector must be in the P (Park) position (auto-
matic transmission).
B
Please be aware that leaving the key in this position will
increase battery drain.
Autostart
This function makes it possible to start the
vehicle without holding the key in the start
position (position III) until the engine starts.
Turn the key to position III and release it. The
starter motor will then operate automatically
(for up to ten seconds) until the engine starts.
Steering wheel lock
The steering wheel lock might be under ten-
sion when the vehicle is parked.
Turn the steering wheel slightly to free the
ignition key.
In order to help reduce vehicle theft, make
sure the steering wheel lock is engaged
before leaving the vehicle.
WARNING
Never switch off the ignition (turn the igni-
tion key to position 0) or remove the key
from the ignition switch while the vehicle is
in motion. This could cause the steering
wheel to lock, which would make the vehi-
cle impossible to steer.
06 Starting and driving
Economical driving
06
146
Economical driving conserves natural
resources
Better driving economy may be obtained by
thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and
stops and adjusting the speed of your vehicle
to immediate traffic conditions. Observe the
following rules:
Bring the engine to normal operating tem-
perature as soon as possible by driving
with a light foot on the accelerator pedal
for the first few minutes of operation. A
cold engine uses more fuel and is subject
to increased wear.
Whenever possible, avoid using the vehi-
cle for driving short distances. This does
not allow the engine to reach normal
operating temperature.
Drive carefully and avoid rapid accelera-
tion and hard braking.
Use the transmission's D (Drive) position
as often as possible and avoid using
"kickdown" to help improve fuel econ-
omy.
Do not exceed posted speed limits.
Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra
load) in the vehicle.
Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire
pressure regularly (when tires are cold).
Remove snow tires when threat of snow
or ice has ended.
Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc,
increase air resistance and also fuel con-
sumption.
At highway driving speeds, fuel consump-
tion will be lower with the air conditioning
on and the windows closed than with the
air conditioning off and the windows
open.
Using the onboard trip computer's fuel
consumption modes can help you learn
how to drive more economically.
Other factors that decrease gas mileage
are:
Dirty air cleaner
Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter
Dragging brakes
Incorrect front end alignment.
Some of the above mentioned items and oth-
ers are checked at the standard Maintenance
Service intervals.
CAUTION
Drive slowly and carefully if going through
standing water (i.e. flooded roadways,
etc.). Damage to the engine could result if
excess water is drawn in through the air
intake system. Never drive the vehicle in
water deeper than 18 inches (48 cm).
06 Starting and driving
Difficult driving conditions
06
147
Driving on rough/unpaved surfaces
The Volvo XC90 is designed primarily for on-
road driving, and it has excellent handling
characteristics on very rough or unpaved
roads.
When driving on poorly maintained or
unpaved roads, please keep the following in
mind:
Reduce speed on rough surfaces to mini-
mize possible damage to the vehicle's
underbody.
When driving on soft surfaces such as dry
sand or snow, try to avoid stopping if at
all possible.
WARNING
Avoid driving diagonally across steep
inclines as this could increase the risk
of a roll-over. Try to drive straight up
or down the slope.
If the road is very steep, avoid turning
the vehicle around to help avoid the
risk of rolling over. Back the vehicle up
or down the incline instead.
NOTE
Avoid driving on steep inclines if the fuel
tank is nearly empty. If the flow of fuel to
the engine is interrupted due to the vehi-
cle's angle of inclination, this could result
in damage to the three-way catalytic con-
verter. We recommend keeping the fuel
tank at least half full when driving on steep
inclines.
Driving through water
The vehicle can be driven through water up to
a depth of approximately 16 inches (40 cm),
at a maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h).
Take particular care when driving through
flowing water.
Clean the electrical connections for trailer wir-
ing after driving in mud or water.
When driving through water, maintain low
speed and do not stop in the water.
WARNING
Avoid driving through standing or
rushing water. Doing so can be dan-
gerous and it may also be difficult to
determine the actual depth of the
water.
If water cannot be avoided, after driv-
ing through the water, press lightly on
the brake pedal to ensure that the
brakes are functioning normally. Water
or mud can make the brake linings
slippery, resulting in delayed braking
effect.
06 Starting and driving
Difficult driving conditions
06
148
CAUTION
Engine damage will occur if water is
drawn into the air cleaner.
If the vehicle is driven through water
deeper than 18 in (48 cm), water may
enter the differential and the transmis-
sion. This reduces the oil's lubricating
capacity and may shorten the service
life of these components.
Do not allow the vehicle to stand in
water up to the door sills longer than
absolutely necessary. This could result
in electrical malfunctions.
If the engine has been stopped while
the car is in water, do not attempt to
restart the engine. Have the car towed
out of the water.
06 Starting and driving
Automatic transmission
06
149
G026990
P (Park)
Use this position when starting the engine or
parking the vehicle.
Never use P while the vehicle is in motion.
The parking brake should also be set when-
ever the vehicle is parked.
The gear selector is mechanically locked
in the P position (SHIFTLOCK). To release
the gear selector from this position, the
engine must be running (or the ignition key
must be in position II) and the brake pedal
must be depressed.
N (Neutral)
Neutral – no gear engaged. Use the parking
brake.
WARNING
Never leave the vehicle unattended when
the engine is running. If, by mistake, the
gear selector is moved from P, the vehicle
may start moving.
R (Reverse)
Never engage R while the vehicle is moving.
D (Drive)
D is the normal driving position and should be
used as often as possible to help improve fuel
economy. The vehicle should not be moving
when shifting from R to the D position.
NOTE
The transmission has 6 forward speeds.
Automatic transmission – shift gate
positions
G020237
Shift gate positions
Depress the button on the front of the gear
selector knob to move between the R, N, D,
and P positions.
CAUTION
The transmission’s temperature is moni-
tored to help prevent damage to the trans-
mission or other drivetrain components. If
there is a risk of overheating, the warning
symbol on the instrument panel will illumi-
nate and a text message will be displayed.
Follow the instructions provided there.
06 Starting and driving
Automatic transmission
06
150
Kickdown
Automatic shift to a lower gear (kickdown) is
achieved by depressing the accelerator pedal
fully and briskly. An upshift will occur when
approaching the top speed for a particular
gear or by releasing the accelerator pedal
slightly.
Kickdown can be used for maximum acceler-
ation or when passing at highway speeds.
NOTE
The gear selector must be in the D (Drive)
position for kickdown to function.
Manual shifting – Geartronic
You can move the gear selector freely
between the MAN (Manual) and D (Drive)
positions to select forward gears while driv-
ing. Gears 3, 4, 5, and 6 have a "lock-up"
function which reduces engine speed and
helps save fuel.
NOTE
Reverse, Neutral, and Park cannot be
selected in Geartronic mode.
A "lock-up" feature
1
reduces engine
speed and help saves fuel.
The currently selected gear will be displayed
in the instrument panel (see page 58).
To access the MAN shifting position from
D, move the gear selector to the left to
MAN.
To return to the D positions from MAN,
move the gear selector to the right.
While driving
If you select the MAN position while driving,
the gear that was being used in the D posi-
tion will also initially be selected in MAN posi-
tion.
Move the gear selector forward (toward
"+") to shift to a higher gear or rearward
(toward "") to shift to a lower gear.
If you hold the gear selector toward "",
the transmission will downshift one gear
and will utilize the braking power of the
engine. If the current speed is too high for
using a lower gear, the downshift will not
occur until the speed has decreased
enough to allow the lower gear to be
used.
If you slow down to a very low speed, the
transmission will automatically shift down.
When starting in the MAN position, 3rd
gear is the highest gear that may be
selected.
W – Winter/Wet driving mode –
enhanced vehicle traction
G030859
Press the W button at the base of the gear
selector to engage/disengage this driving
mode (see illustration). The
W symbol will
appear in the display (see page 58) when the
function is activated.
This mode may be selected for starting/
moving off on slippery roads. The vehicle
1
Six-speed transmission: gears 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
06 Starting and driving
Automatic transmission
06
151
starts off in 3rd gear to help maintain traction.
First and second gears will only be used dur-
ing kickdown.
NOTE
Mode W can be chosen regardless of the
postion of the gear selector but will only
function when the gear selector is in the D
(drive) position.
06 Starting and driving
Jump starting
06
152
G030860
Follow these instructions to jump start your
vehicle's dead battery or to jump start
another vehicle's dead battery using your
vehicle. Although your vehicle's battery is
located under the floor of the cargo area,
jumper cables should be connected in the
engine compartment, to the points shown in
the illustrations.
If the 12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in
another vehicle, check that the vehicles are
not touching to prevent premature comple-
tion of a circuit. Be sure to follow jump star-
ting instructions provided for the other vehi-
cle.
To jump start your vehicle:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. First connect the auxiliary battery positive
(+) terminal (1) to the positive (+) terminal
in your vehicle's engine compartment (2),
located under a small black plastic cover
attached to the fuse box cover, marked
with a "+" sign. Remove the cover on the
main fuse box if necessary to access this
terminal. Then connect the auxiliary bat-
tery's negative (–) terminal (3) to the
ground point in your vehicle's engine
compartment (4).
3. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle,
then start the engine in the vehicle with
dead battery.
4. After the engine has started, first remove
the negative (–) terminal jumper cable.
Then remove the positive (+) terminal
jumper cable.
WARNING
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!
Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds, chemicals known to the state of
California to cause cancer and reproduc-
tive harm. Wash hands after handling.
WARNING
Do not connect the jumper cable to
any part of the fuel system or to any
moving parts. Avoid touching hot
manifolds.
Never expose the battery to open
flame or electric spark.
Do not smoke near the battery.
Batteries generate hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do
not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,
skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If
contact occurs, flush the affected area
immediately with water. Obtain medi-
cal help immediately if eyes are affec-
ted.
Failure to follow the instructions for
jump starting can lead to personal
injury.
06 Starting and driving
All Wheel Drive*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
153
All Wheel Drive (AWD) – general
information
Your Volvo can be equipped with an electron-
ically controlled All Wheel Drive system*,
which means that power is distributed auto-
matically between the front and rear wheels.
Under normal driving conditions, most of the
engine's power is directed to the front
wheels. However, if there is any tendency for
the front wheels to spin, an electronically
controlled coupling distributes power to the
wheels that have the best traction.
Tire dimensions
Volvo recommends that you always drive on
tires of the same brand, size, construction
(radial), tread pattern, load-, speed-, traction-,
temperature-, and treadwear rating. Never
drive on mixed tires, except for brief periods
when the temporary spare tire is in use.
Always use properly inflated tires of correct
dimensions. Tire size and inflation pressures
are shown on the tire inflation pressure plac-
ards, located on the driver's side B-pillar (the
structural member at the side of the vehicle,
at the rear of the driver's door opening), or on
the inside of the fuel filler door on Canadian
models.
Temporary Spare
The temporary spare tire is for temporary,
low-speed, short-distance use only. Replace
it with a full-sized tire as soon as possible. Do
not drive on the temporary spare at speeds
above 50 m.p.h. (80 km/h).
NOTE
Never install snow chains on a temporary
spare.
06 Starting and driving
Brake system
06
154
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
BRAKE Brake circuit malfunction
The brake system is a hydraulic system con-
sisting of two master cylinders and two sepa-
rate brake circuits. If a problem should occur
in one of these circuits, it is still possible to
stop the vehicle with the other brake circuit.
If the brake pedal must be depressed farther
than normal and requires greater foot pres-
sure, the stopping distance will be longer.
A warning light in the instrument panel will
light up to warn the driver that a fault has
occurred.
If this light comes on while driving or braking,
stop immediately and check the brake fluid
level in the reservoir.
NOTE
Press the brake pedal hard and maintain
pressure on the pedal – do not pump the
brakes.
WARNING
If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in
the reservoir or if a
BRAKE FAILURE
STOP SAFELY message is displayed in
the text window: DO NOT DRIVE. Have
the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician and have the
brake system inspected.
NOTE
When the vehicle is at a standstill and the
engine is idling, e.g. at a traffic light and
the brake pedal is depressed, the pedal
may go down slightly. This is a normal
function of the power-assisted brake sys-
tem.
Brake pad inspection
On vehicles equipped with a jack*, the condi-
tion of the brake pads can be checked by
raising the vehicle (see page 198 for informa-
tion about using the jack and removing a
wheel) and performing a visual inspection of
the brake pads.
WARNING
If the vehicle has been driven immedi-
ately prior to a brake pad inspection,
the wheel hub, brake components,
etc., will be very hot. Allow time for
these components to cool before car-
rying out the inspection.
Apply the parking brake and put the
gear selector in the Park (P) position.
Block the wheels standing on the
ground, use rigid wooden blocks or
large stones.
06 Starting and driving
Brake system
06
155
WARNING
Use the jack intended for the vehicle
when changing a tire. For any other
job, use stands to support the vehicle.
The jack should be kept well-greased
and clean, and should not be dam-
aged.
Be sure the jack is on a firm, level,
non-slippery surface.
No objects should be placed between
the base of jack and the ground, or
between the jack and the attachment
bar on the vehicle.
The jack must correctly engage the
jack attachment.
Never allow any part of your body to
be extended under a vehicle suppor-
ted by a jack.
Power brakes function only when the
engine is running
The power brakes utilize vacuum pressure
which is only created when the engine is run-
ning. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with
the engine switched off.
If the power brakes are not working, consid-
erably higher pressure will be required on the
brake pedal to compensate for the lack of
power assistance. This can happen for exam-
ple when towing your vehicle or if the engine
is switched off when the vehicle is rolling. The
brake pedal feels harder than usual.
Water on brake discs and brake pads
affects braking
Driving in rain and slush or passing through
an automatic car wash can cause water to
collect on the brake discs and pads. This will
cause a delay in braking effect when the
pedal is depressed. To avoid such a delay
when the brakes are needed, depress the
pedal occasionally when driving through rain,
slush etc. This will remove the water from the
brakes. Check that brake application feels
normal. This should also be done after wash-
ing or starting in very damp or cold weather.
Severe strain on the brake system
The brakes will be subject to severe strain
when driving in mountains or hilly areas, or
when towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usually
slower, which means that the cooling of the
brakes is less efficient than when driving on
level roads. To reduce the strain on the
brakes, shift into a lower gear and let the
engine help with the braking. Do not forget
that, if you are towing a trailer, the brakes will
be subjected to a greater than normal load.
Anti-lock brakes (ABS)
If the ABS warning lamp lights up there is a
malfunction in the ABS system (the standard
braking system will however function) and the
vehicle should be driven cautiously to a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician
for inspection. The Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) helps to improve vehicle control (stop-
ping and steering) during severe braking con-
ditions by limiting brake lockup. When the
system "senses" impending lockup, braking
pressure is automatically modulated in order
to help prevent lockup, which could lead to a
skid.
The system performs a self-diagnostic test
when the engine is started and when the
vehicle first reaches a speed of approxi-
mately 12 mph (20 km/h). The brake pedal
will pulsate several times and a sound may be
audible from the ABS control module. This is
normal.
To obtain optimal effect from the ABS sys-
tem, constant pressure should be kept on the
brake pedal. Do not pump the brake pedal.
The switching of the ABS modulator will be
audible and the brake pedal will pulsate dur-
ing braking. Please be aware that ABS does
not increase the absolute braking potential of
the vehicle. While control will be enhanced,
ABS will not shorten stopping distances on
slippery surfaces.
06 Starting and driving
Brake system
06
156
ABS with EBD (Electronic Brake Force
Distribution)
EBD is an integrated part of the ABS system.
EBD regulates the hydraulic pressure to the
rear brakes to help provide optimal braking
capacity. The brake pedal will pulsate during
braking, which is normal.
If the BRAKE and ABS warning lights come
on at the same time, this could indicate a
fault in the brake system.
1. Stop the vehicle in a suitable place and
switch off the engine.
2. Restart the engine.
If both warning lights go off, no further
action is required.
If both lights are still on after the engine
has been restarted, switch off the engine
again and check the brake fluid level (see
page 225 for the location of the brake
fluid reservoir).
WARNING
If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in
the reservoir or if a
Brake failure –
Service urgent message is displayed in
the text window: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the
vehicle towed to a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician and have the
brake system inspected.
If the brake fluid level is above the MIN
mark, drive carefully to a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician and
have the brake system inspected.
Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA)
The EBA function is designed to provide full
brake effect immediately in the event of sud-
den, hard braking. The system is activated by
the speed with which you depress the brake
pedal.
NOTE
When the EBA system is activated, the
brake pedal will go down and pressure
in the brake system immediately
increases to the maximum level. You
must maintain full pressure on the
brake pedal in order to utilize the sys-
tem completely. There will be no brak-
ing effect if the pedal is released. EBA
is automatically deactivated when the
brake pedal is released.
When the vehicle has been parked for
some time, the brake pedal may sink
more than usual when the engine is
started. This is normal and the pedal
will return to its usual position when it
is released.
06 Starting and driving
Parking brake
06
157
G026992
Parking brake pedal
Handle for releasing the parking brake
The parking brake pedal is located under the
dashboard, to the left of the brake pedal.
NOTE
The indicator light will light up even if the
parking brake has only been partiallyap-
plied.
When applying the parking brake
1. Press firmly on the brake pedal.
2. Press down pedal (1) firmly to its full
extent.
3. Release the brake pedal and ensure that
the vehicle is at a standstill.
4. If the vehicle rolls, the parking brake
pedal must be pushed down more firmly.
5. When parking a vehicle always put the
gear selector in P.
Parking on a hill
If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the
front wheels so that they point away from
the curb.
If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the
front wheels so that they point toward the
curb.
Releasing the parking brake
1. Press firmly on the brake pedal.
2. Pull handle (2).
NOTE
If you inadvertently pull the plastic cover, it
can be pressed back into place.
WARNING
Press down the parking brake pedal firmly
to its full extent.
06 Starting and driving
Stability system
06
158
Dynamic Stability Traction Control
(DSTC)
The stability system consists of a number of
functions designed help reduce wheel spin,
counteract skidding, and to generally help
improve directional stability.
NOTE
A pulsating sound will be audible when the
system is actively operating and is normal.
Traction control (TC)
This function is designed to help reduce
wheel spin by transferring power from a drive
wheel that begins to lose traction to the
wheel on the opposite side of the vehicle (on
the same axle).
TC is most active at low speeds.
This is one of DSTC's permanent functions
and cannot be switched off.
Spin control (SC)
The spin control function is designed to help
prevent the drive wheels from spinning while
the vehicle is accelerating.
Under certain circumstances, such as when
driving with snow chains, or driving in deep
snow or loose sand, it may be advisable to
temporarily switch off this function for maxi-
mum tractive force.
Temporarily switching off Spin control
1. Turn the thumbwheel (1) on the left-side
steering wheel lever until the DSTC menu
is displayed.
2. Hold down the RESET button (2) to tog-
gle between
DSTC ON or DSTC SPIN
CONTROL OFF.
NOTE
The message
DSTC SPIN CONTROL
OFF indicates that the stability sys-
tem's spin control function has tempo-
rarily been switched off.
The stability control indicator light will
illuminate and remain on until spin
control has been reactivated.
The spin control function is automati-
cally enabled each time the engine is
started.
DSTC ON indicates that all system
functions are active.
Active Yaw Control (AYC)
This function helps maintain directional stabil-
ity, for example when cornering, by braking
one or more of the wheels if the vehicle
shows a tendency to skid or slide laterally.
This is one of DSTC's permanent functions
and cannot be switched off.
WARNING
The car's handling and stability characte-
ristics will be altered if the DSTC system
functions have been disabled.
06 Starting and driving
Stability system
06
159
DSTC-related messages in the text
window
TRACTION CONTROL TEMPORARILY
OFF : The system has been temporarily
switched off due to high brake tempera-
ture and will automatically switch on
again when the brakes have cooled.
ANTI-SKID SERVICE REQUIRED: The
system has been automatically disen-
gaged due to a fault. A trained and quali-
fied Volvo service technician should
check the system.
Symbols in the instrument panel
The Stability Control indicator light
This light indicates different con-
ditions, depending on how it illu-
minates.
The Stability Control indicator light
illuminates for approximately 2 seconds
This indicates that the system is performing a
self-diagnostic test when the ignition is
switched on.
The Stability Control indicator light
flashes
This indicates that the stability system is
actively functioning to help counteract wheel
spin and/or a skid.
The Stability Control indicator light
glows steadily
ANTI-SKID SERVICE REQUIRED will be
displayed in the text window at the same
time.
A fault is indicated in the stability system.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and
switch off the engine.
Restart the engine.
If the indicator light goes out, the fault
was temporary and no further action is
required.
If the indicator light remains on, drive to
an authorized Volvo workshop as soon as
possible to have the system checked.
The Stability Control indicator light
glows steadily
If DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF is displayed
in the text window at the same time, this is a
reminder that spin control has been disabled
by the driver.
The warning symbol
The warning symbol glows
steadily yellow
The system has been temporarily switched
off due to high brake temperature.
TRACTION CONTROL TEMPORARILY
OFF will be displayed. The system will auto-
matically switch on again when the brakes
have cooled.
WARNING
The stability system is intended to help
improve driving safety. It supplements, but
can never replace, the driver's judgement
and responsibility when operating the vehi-
cle. Speed and driving style should always
be adapted to traffic and road conditions.
06 Starting and driving
Front/rear park assist*
06
160
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Front/rear park assist
The park assist system is designed to assist
you when driving into parking spaces,
garages, etc. It utilizes four ultrasound sen-
sors located in one or both bumpers to meas-
ure the distance to a vehicle, object, or a per-
son who may be close to the front or rear of
your vehicle.
Park assist is available in two versions:
Rear bumper only
Front and rear bumpers
WARNING
Park Assist is an information system, NOT
a safety system. This system is designed
to be a supplementary aid when parking
the vehicle. It is not, however, intended to
replace the driver's attention and judge-
ment.
Function
The system is activated automatically when
the vehicle is started. The indicator light in the
button in the center console illuminates.
The front park assist system is active
from the time the engine is started until
the vehicle exceeds a speed of approxi-
mately 10 mph (15 km/h). It is also active
when the vehicle is backing up.
Rear park assist is active when the engine
is running and reverse gear has been
selected.
Rear park assist
The distance monitored behind the vehicle is
approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The signal comes
from the rear speakers.
The system must be deactivated when towing
a trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mounted
carrier, etc, which could trigger the rear park
assist system's sensors.
NOTE
Rear park assist is deactivated automati-
cally when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine
trailer wiring is used.
Front park assist
The distance monitored in front of the vehicle
is approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible
signal comes from the audio system's front
speakers.
It may not be possible to combine auxili-
ary headlights and front park assist since
these lights could trigger the system's
sensors.
Activating/deactivating park assist
The system is activated automatically when
the vehicle is started.
Press the Park assist button on the center
console (see page 65) to temporarily
deactivate the system(s). The indicator
light in the button will go out when the
system has been deactivated.
Park assist will be automatically reactiva-
ted the next time the engine is started, or
if the button is pressed (the indicator light
in the button will illuminate).
06 Starting and driving
Front/rear park assist*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
161
NOTE
Front park assist is disengaged auto-
matically when the parking brake is
applied.
If the vehicle is equipped with front
and rear park assist, both systems will
be deactivated by pressing the button.
Audible signals from the park assist
system
The Park Assist system uses an intermittent
tone that pulses faster as you come close to
an object, and becomes constant when you
are within approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an
object in front of or behind the vehicle. If the
volume of another source from the audio sys-
tem is high, this will be automatically lowered.
If there are objects within this distance both
behind and in front of the vehicle, the signal
alternates between front and rear speakers.
Faults in the system
If the yellow warning symbol illu-
minates and
PARK ASSIST
SERVICE REQUIRED is shown
on the information display, this
indicates that the system is not
functioning properly and has been disen-
gaged. Consult a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
CAUTION
In certain circumstances, the park assist
system may give unexpected warning sig-
nals that can be caused by external sound
sources that use the same ultrasound fre-
quencies as the system. This may include
such things as the horns of other vehicles,
wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes,
motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This does
not indicate a fault in the system.
Cleaning the sensors
G026946
Park assist sensors
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
ensure that they work properly. Clean them
with water and a suitable car washing deter-
gent.
Ice and snow covering the sensors may
cause incorrect warning signals.
NOTE
If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt,
snow, or ice, this could result in false
warning signals from the park assist sys-
tem.
06 Starting and driving
Towing
06
162
G027042
Positions for attaching towing eyelets
Emergency towing
The towing eyelet is located in the tool bag,
under the floor of the cargo area. This eyelet
must be screwed into the positions provided
on the right sides of either the front or rear
bumper (see illustrations).
To attach the towing eyelet:
1. Use a coin to pry open the lower edge of
the cover (A)
2. Screw the towing eyelet (C) in place (B),
first by hand and then using the tire iron
until it is securely in place.
After the vehicle has been towed, the eyelet
should be removed and returned to the tool
bag. Press the cover back into position.
WARNING
Do not use the towing eyelets to pull the
vehicle up onto a flat bed tow truck.
Precautions when the vehicle is in tow
The steering wheel must be unlocked.
Turn the ignition key to position I or II.
The gear selector must be in position N.
Maximum speed: 50 mph (80 km/h). Do
not exceed the maximum allowable tow-
ing speed.
Maximum distance with front wheels on
ground: 50 miles (80 km).
While the vehicle is being towed, try to
keep the tow rope taut at all times.
The vehicle should only be towed in the
forward direction.
06 Starting and driving
Towing
06
163
CAUTION
Vehicles with AWD (All Wheel Drive) with
the front wheels off the ground should not
be towed at speeds above 50 mph
(70 km/h) or for distances longer than
30 miles (50 km).
CAUTION
Please check with state and local
authorities before attempting this type
of towing, as vehicles being towed are
subject to regulations regarding maxi-
mum towing speed, length and type of
towing device, lighting, etc.
If the vehicle's battery is dead, do not
attempt to start the vehicle by pushing
or pulling it as this will damage the
three-way catalytic converter(s). The
engine must be jump started using an
auxiliary battery (see page 152).
If the vehicle is being towed on a flat
bed truck, the towing eyelets must not
be used to pull the vehicle up onto the
flat bed or to secure the vehicle on the
flat bed. Consult the tow truck opera-
tor.
WARNING
The power brakes and power steering
will not function when the engine is not
running. Approximately 5 times more
pressure will be required on the brake
pedal and the steering wheel will be
considerably harder to turn.
The towing eyelets must not be used
for pulling the vehicle out of a ditch or
for any similar purpose involving
severe strain.
G030862
Towing vehicles with front wheel
drive/All Wheel Drive
Volvo recommends the use of flat bed equip-
ment.
If wheel lift equipment must be used, please
use extreme caution to help avoid damage to
the vehicle. In this case, the vehicle should
be towed with the rear wheels on the
ground if at all possible.
If it is absolutely necessary to tow the vehicle
with the front wheels on the ground, please
refer to the towing information on the previ-
ous page.
CAUTION
Sling-type equipment applied at the
front will damage radiator and air con-
ditioning lines.
It is equally important not to use sling-
type equipment at the rear or apply lift-
ing equipment inside the rear wheels;
serious damage to the rear axle may
result.
If the vehicle is being towed on a flat
bed truck, the towing eyelets must not
be used to secure the vehicle on the
flat bed. Consult the tow truck opera-
tor.
06 Starting and driving
Towing a trailer
06
164
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The maximum weights recommended by
Volvo for trailers with brakes are shown in
the table below.
Recommended hitch tongue load: not
more than 10% of the trailer's weight. The
trailer load should be positioned so that it
does not shift and the tongue load should be
10% of the trailer's weight. However, the
tongue load should not exceed the maximum
permissible weights indicated in the table
below.
No. of occu-
pants
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Seating position Front seat Front seat 2nd row of seats 2nd row of seats 2nd row of seats 3rd row of seats* 3rd row of seats*
All Wheel Drive 5,000 lbs
(2250 kg)
5,000 lbs
(2250 kg)
4,500 lbs
(2050 kg)
3,700 lbs
(1700 kg)
2,900 lbs
(1350 kg)
1,800 lbs
(800 kg)
Trailer towing not
recommended
Max. trailer hitch
tongue load
500 lbs
(225 kg)
500 lbs
(225 kg)
450 lbs
(205 kg)
370 lbs
(170 kg)
290 lbs
(135 kg)
180 lbs
(80 kg)
Front Wheel Drive 4,000 lbs
(1800 kg)
4,000 lbs
(1800 kg)
4,000 lbs
(1800 kg)
4,000 lbs
(1800 kg)
3,700 lbs
(1650 kg)
2,500 lbs
(1150 kg)
1,400 lbs
(650 kg)
Max. trailer hitch
tongue load
400 lbs
(180 kg)
400 lbs
(180 kg)
400 lbs
(180 kg)
400 lbs
(180 kg)
370 lbs
(165 kg)
250 lbs
(115 kg)
140 lba
(65 kg)
06 Starting and driving
Towing a trailer
06
165
Points to keep in mind when towing a
trailer
When towing trailers without brakes, the
maximum permissible trailer weight is
1,700 lbs (750 kg).
If necessary, redistribute the weight of
any cargo in the trailer to avoid excessive
weight on the trailer hitch.
The maximum trailer weight listed in the
table for All Wheel Drive models,
5,000 lbs (2250 kg) is only applicable
when there are not more than two occu-
pants in the vehicle, in the front seats,
with a combined weight of 300 lbs
(135 kg), with no other cargo in the vehi-
cle.
The maximum weight listed for Front
Wheel Drive models, 4,000 lbs (1800 kg)
is only applicable when there are not
more than four occupants in the vehicle,
in the front seats and second row of
seats, with a combined weight of 600 lbs
(270 kg), with no other cargo in the vehi-
cle.
Vehicles used for towing a trailer on a
regular basis, or for long-distance high-
way towing should be equipped with an
automatic transmission oil cooler and
Volvo's automatic self-leveling system for
the rear suspension. Consult your Volvo
retailer.
Volvo recommends the use of Volvo
trailer hitches that are specially designed
for the vehicle.
All Volvo models are equipped with
energy-absorbing shock-mounted bump-
ers. Trailer hitch installation should not
interfere with the proper operation of this
bumper system.
Increase tire pressure to recommended
full inflation pressure. See chapter
"Wheels and tires."
When your vehicle is new, avoid towing
heavy trailers during the first 620 miles
(1,000 km).
Engine and transmission are subject to
increased loads. Therefore, engine cool-
ant temperature should be closely
watched when driving in hot climates or
hilly terrain. Use a lower gear and turn off
the air conditioner if the temperature
gauge needle enters the red range.
If the automatic transmission begins to
overheat, a message will be displayed in
the text window.
Hauling a trailer affects handling, durabil-
ity, and economy.
It is necessary to balance trailer brakes
with the towing vehicle brakes to provide
a safe stop (check and observe state/
local regulations).
Do not connect the trailer's brake system
directly to the vehicle's brake system.
Remove the ball and drawbar assembly
when the hitch is not being used.
Volvo recommends the use of synthetic
engine oil when towing a trailer over long
distances or in mountainous areas.
NOTE
When parking the vehicle with a trailer
on a hill, apply the parking brake
before putting the gear selector in P.
When starting on a hill, put the gear
selector in D before releasing the park-
ing brake. Always follow the trailer
manufacturer's recommendations for
wheel chocking.
If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift
positions while towing a trailer, make
sure the gear you select does not put
too much strain on the engine (using
too high a gear).
06 Starting and driving
Towing a trailer
06
166
WARNING
Bumper-attached trailer hitches must
not be used on Volvos, nor should
safety chains be attached to the
bumper.
Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle
rear axle must not be used.
Never connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to the vehicle
brake system, nor a trailer's lighting
system directly to the vehicle lighting
system. Consult a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician for correct
installation.
When towing a trailer, the trailer's
safety wire must be correctly fastened
to the hole or hook provided in the
trailer hitch on the vehicle. The safety
wire should never be fastened to or
wound around the drawbar ball.
Leveling
If your vehicle is equipped with automatic lev-
eling, the rear suspension always retains the
correct ride height regardless of the load.
The system adjusts the rear suspension
to the correct level after the vehicle has
been driven a short distance.
When the vehicle is stationary, the rear
suspension lowers, which is normal.
06 Starting and driving
Detachable trailer hitch
06
167
Overview
A
C
E
D
B
G010496
Ball holder
Locking bolt
Cotter pin
Hitch assembly
Safety wire attachment
Installing the ball holder
1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from
the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt
out of the hitch assembly.
2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assem-
bly.
3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the
one in the hitch assembly.
4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitch
assembly/ball holder.
5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end
of the locking bolt.
Removing the ball holder
1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking
bolt and slide the locking bolt out of the
ball holder/hitch assembly.
2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch
assembly.
A cover for the hitch assembly can be pur-
chased from your Volvo retailer.
06 Starting and driving
Load carriers (accessory)
06
168
Positioning load carriers
If wing-shaped load carriers are used, make
sure that they are installed on the roof rails
with the rounded edge forward. Load carriers
of this type are identical and can be placed
anywhere along the roof rails.
When not in use, we recommend that the
front load carrier be placed approximately
2 inches (5 cm) in front of the center roof rail
anchorage point and the rear load carrier
approximately 1.5 inches (3.5 cm) in front of
the rear rail anchorage. This will help to
reduce wind noise.
Installing load carriers
Make sure that the load carriers are pressed
firmly out against the roof rail and securely
tightened place. Check regularly that any load
carriers are securely in place.
WARNING
Loads carried on the vehicle's roof should
not exceed 220 lbs (100 kg), including the
weight of the load carriers and any other
load carrying equipment (ski boxes, bicy-
cle racks, etc.). Excessive loads on the
roof can adversely affect the handling and
roadholding characteristics of the vehicle.
06 Starting and driving
Cold weather precautions
06
169
If you wish to check your vehicle before the
approach of cold weather, the following
advice is worth noting:
Make sure that the engine coolant con-
tains 50 percent antifreeze. Any other
mixture will reduce freeze protection. This
gives protection against freezing down to
–31 °F (–35 °C). See section "Coolant".
The use of "recycled" antifreeze is not
approved by Volvo. Different types of
antifreeze must not be mixed.
Volvo recommends using only genuine
Volvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator.
Your Volvo retailer stocks plenty of Volvo
engine coolant to protect your vehicle
during cold weather.
Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – this
prevents the formation of condensation in
the tank. In addition, in extremely cold
weather conditions it is worthwhile to add
fuel line de-icer before refueling.
The viscosity of the engine oil is impor-
tant. Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil)
improves cold-weather starting as well as
decreasing fuel consumption while the
engine is warming up. Full synthetic
0W-30 oil is recommended for driving in
areas with sustained low temperatures.
The load placed on the battery is greater
during the winter since the windshield
wipers, lighting, etc. are used more often.
Moreover, the capacity of the battery
decreases as the temperature drops. In
very cold weather, a poorly charged bat-
tery can freeze and be damaged. It is
therefore advisable to check the state of
charge more frequently and spray an anti-
rust oil on the battery posts.
Volvo recommends the use of snow tires
on all four wheels for winter driving – see
section "Wheels and tires."
To prevent the washer fluid reservoir
from freezing, add washer solvents con-
taining antifreeze (see page 224 for the
location of the washer fluid reservoir).
This is important since dirt is often
splashed on the windshield during winter
driving, requiring the frequent use of the
washers and wipers. Volvo Washer Sol-
vent should be diluted as follows:
Down to 14 ° F (–10 ° C): 1 part washer
solvent and 4 parts water
Down to 5 ° F (–15 ° C): 1 part washer
solvent and 3 parts water
Down to 0 ° F (–18 ° C):1 part washer
solvent and 2 parts water
Down to –18 ° F (–28 ° C): 1 part washer
solvent and 1 part water
Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks.
NOTE
Avoid the use of de-icing sprays as they
can cause damage to the locks.
W – Winter/Wet driving mode –
enhanced vehicle traction
Mode W will only function if the gear
selector is in the (D)rive position.
Press the button at the base of the gear
selector to engage/disengage this driving
mode.
An LED in the button will light up to indi-
cate that W is engaged and this will also
be displayed in the instrument panel (see
page 58).
This mode may be selected for starting/
moving off on slippery roads.
06 Starting and driving
Before a long distance trip
06
170
It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle
checked by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician before driving long dis-
tances. Your retailer or service technician will
also be able to supply you with bulbs, fuses,
spark plugs and wiper blades for your use in
the event that problems occur.
As a minimum, the following items should be
checked before any long trip:
Check that engine runs smoothly and that
fuel consumption is normal.
Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage.
Check transmission oil level
1
.
Check condition of drive belts.
Check state of the battery's charge.
Examine tires carefully (the spare tire as
well), and replace those that are worn.
Check tire pressures.
The brakes, front wheel alignment, and
steering gear should be checked by a
trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
cian only.
Check all lights, including high beams.
Reflective warning triangles are legally
required in some states/provinces.
Have a word with your Volvo retailer if
you intend to drive in countries where it
may be difficult to obtain the correct fuel.
Consider your destination. If you will be
driving through an area where snow or ice
are likely to occur, consider snow tires.
1
To prevent injury from contact with hot surfaces, do not inspect your vehicle’s transmission fluid yourself. Have your vehicle’s transmission fluid level inspected by a qualified Volvo service techni-
cian.
06 Starting and driving
Blind Spot Information System*
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
171
G020295
BLIS camera
Indicator light
BLIS symbol
The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is
an information system that indicates the pres-
ence of another vehicle moving in the same
direction as your vehicle in the side-view mir-
ror's "blind area."
The system is based on digital camera tech-
nology. The cameras (1) are located beneath
the side-view mirrors.
When one (or both) of the cameras have
detected a vehicle in the blind area (up to
approximately 10 ft. (3 meters) from the side
of your vehicle, and up to approximately 31 ft.
(9.5 meters) behind the side-view mirror), see
the illustration, the indicator light in the door
panel (2) illuminates. The light will glow con-
tinuously to alert the driver of the vehicle in
the blind area.
WARNING
BLIS is an information system, NOT a
warning or safety system.
BLIS does not eliminate the need for
you to visually confirm the conditions
around you, and the need for you to
turn your head and shoulders to make
sure that you can safely change lanes.
As the driver, you have full responsibil-
ity for changing lanes in a safe man-
ner.
NOTE
The door panel indicator light illuminates
on the side of the vehicle where the sys-
tem has detected another vehicle. If your
vehicle is passed on both sides at the
same time, both lights will illuminate.
Areas monitored by BLIS
Distance A = approx. 10 ft. (3 meters)
Distance B = approx. 31 ft. (9.5 meters)
BLIS has an integrated function that alerts the
driver if a fault should occur with the system.
For example, if one or both of the system's
cameras are obscured, a message ( see the
table on page 173) will appear in the informa-
tion display in the instrument panel. If this
occurs, clean the camera lenses. If neces-
sary, the system can be temporarily switched
off (for instructions, see page 173).
When does BLIS function
The system functions when your vehicle is
moving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).
06 Starting and driving
Blind Spot Information System*
06
172
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
When you pass another vehicle:
The system reacts when you pass another
vehicle at a speed of up to 6 mph (10 km/h)
faster than that vehicle.
When you are passed by another vehicle:
The system reacts if your vehicle is passed by
another vehicle at a speed of up to 43 mph
(70 km/h) faster than your vehicle.
WARNING
BLIS does not function in sharp
curves.
BLIS does not function when your
vehicle is backing up.
If you are towing a wide trailer, this
may prevent the BLIS cameras from
detecting other vehicles in adjacent
lanes.
How BLIS functions in daylight and
darkness
Daylight
BLIS reacts to the shape of surrounding vehi-
cles. The system is designed to help detect
motor vehicles such as cars, trucks, buses,
motorcycles, etc.
Darkness
BLIS reacts to the headlights of surrounding
vehicles. In order to be detected by BLIS, a
vehicle in the blind area must have its head-
lights on. This means, for example, that the
system will not detect a trailer without head-
lights that is being towed behind a car or
truck.
WARNING
BLIS does not react to cyclists or
mopeds.
BLIS does not react to vehicles that
are standing still.
The BLIS cameras have the same limi-
tation as the human eye. In other
words, their "vision is impaired" by
adverse weather conditions such as
heavy snowfall, intense light directly
into the camera, dense fog, etc.
Cleaning the BLIS camera lenses
In order to function optimally, the BLIS cam-
era lenses must be kept clean. They can be
wiped clean with a soft cloth or wet sponge.
CAUTION
Clean the lenses carefully to avoid
scratching.
The lenses are electrically heated to
help melt ice or snow. If necessary,
gently brush away snow from the len-
ses.
Limitations
In certain situations, the BLIS indicator light(s)
may illuminate even when there are no other
vehicles in the area monitored by the system.
NOTE
If the BLIS indicator lights illuminate occa-
sionally even when there are no other vehi-
cles in the blind area, this does not indi-
cate a fault in the system.
In the event of a fault,
Blind spot syst.
service required will be displayed.
The following are several examples of situa-
tions in which the BLIS indicator light(s) may
illuminate even when there are no other vehi-
cles in the area monitored by the system.
06 Starting and driving
Blind Spot Information System*
06
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
173
Light reflected from a wet road surface
G018177
The vehicle's own shadow against a large, light,
smooth surface such as barriers between lanes
on a highway
Sunlight directly in the camera when the sun is
low on the horizon
G026955
Switching BLIS on and off
BLIS is automatically activated when the igni-
tion is switched on. The indicator lights will
provide confirmation by flashing 3 times.
The system can be switched off by press-
ing the BLIS button in the center console
(see the illustration). The indicator light in
the button goes out when the system is
switched off, and a text message is dis-
played.
BLIS can be switched on again by press-
ing the button. The indicator light in the
button will illuminate and a new text mes-
sage will be displayed. Press the READ
button (see page 62) to erase the mes-
sage.
System status Text in the display
BLIND-SPOT
SYST SERVICE
REQUIRED
BLIS not functioning
properly. Contact an
authorized Volvo serv-
ice technician.
BLIND-SPOT
SYST R CAM-
ERA BLOCKED
The right side BLIS
camera is obscured.
Clean the lenses.
BLIND-SPOT
SYST L CAM-
ERA BLOCKED
The left side BLIS
camera is obscured.
Clean the lenses.
BLIND-SPOT
SYST CAM-
ERAS
BLOCKED
BLIS camera
obscured. Clean the
lenses.
BLIND-SPOT
INFO SYSTEM
OFF
BLIS system off
06 Starting and driving
Blind Spot Information System*
06
174
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
System status Text in the display
BLIND-SPOT
INFO SYSTEM
ON
BLIS system on
BLIND-SPOT
SYST FUNC-
TION REDUCED
The BLIS cameras'
function has been
reduced due to weak
or impaired data
transfer between the
BLIS system's cam-
eras and the vehicle's
electrical system. The
cameras will reset
themselves when this
data transfer has
returned to normal.
The messages listed above can only be dis-
played if the ignition key is in position II (or if
the engine is running) and if BLIS is active (i.e.
if the system has not been turned off by
pressing the BLIS button).
06 Starting and driving
06
175
176
General information............................................................................... 178
Tire inflation .......................................................................................... 181
Tire inflation pressure table................................................................... 183
Tire designations................................................................................... 184
Glossary of tire terminology.................................................................. 186
Vehicle loading...................................................................................... 187
Uniform Tire Quality Grading................................................................ 189
Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires................................................ 190
Temporary spare................................................................................... 191
Tire Sealing System ............................................................................. 192
Changing wheels................................................................................... 198
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)............................................. 203
W H E E L S A N D T I R E S
07 Wheels and tires
General information
07
178
Introduction
Your vehicle is equipped with tires according
to the vehicle's tire information placard on the
B-pillar (the structural member at the side of
the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door
opening).
CAUTION
Some Volvo models are equipped with an
Ultra High Performance tire and wheel
combination designed to provide maxi-
mum dry pavement performance with con-
sideration for hydroplaning resistance.
They may be more susceptible to road
hazard damage and, depending on driving
conditions, may achieve a tread life of less
than 20,000 miles (30,000 km). Even if this
vehicle is equipped with Volvo’s advanced
AWD or DSTC system, these tires are not
designed for winter driving, and should be
replaced with winter tires when weather
conditions dictate.
The tires have good road holding characteris-
tics and offer good handling on dry and wet
surfaces. It should be noted however that the
tires have been developed to give these fea-
tures on snow/ice-free surfaces.
Most models are equipped with "all-season"
tires, which provide a somewhat higher
degree of road holding on slippery surfaces
than tires without the "all-season" rating.
However, for optimum road holding on icy or
snow-covered roads, we recommend suitable
winter tires on all four wheels.
When replacing tires, be sure that the new
tires are the same size designation, type
(radial) and preferably from the same manu-
facturer, on all four wheels. Otherwise there is
a risk of altering the car's roadholding and
handling characteristics.
New Tires
Remember that tires are perishable goods. As
of 2000, the manufacturing week and year
(Department of Transportation (DOT) stamp)
will be indicated with 4 digits (e.g., 1513
means that the tire illustrated was manufac-
tured during week 15 of 2013).
Tire rotation
Your vehicle has no required tire rotation. Tire
wear is affected by a number of factors such
as tire inflation, ambient temperature, driving
style, etc.
NOTE
If the tires are rotated, they should
only be moved from front to rear or
vice versa. They should never be rota-
ted left to right/right to left.
Ideally, tire rotation should be done the
first time after approximately 3,000
miles (5,000 km) and thereafter at
6,000-mile (10,000-km) intervals.
Some customers find that tire rotation
may help to get extra mileage from tire
life.
Tire rotation should only be performed
if front/rear tire wear is fairly even and
tread height is above 1/16" (1.6 mm).
Your Volvo retailer can also provide guidance
based on your particular driving circumstan-
ces.
Tire age
Tires degrade over time, even when they are
not being used. It is recommended that tires
generally be replaced after 6 years of normal
service. Heat caused by hot climates, fre-
07 Wheels and tires
General information
07
}}
179
quent high loading conditions or Ultra Violet
(U.V) exposure can accelerate the aging proc-
ess. The temporary spare
1
should also be
replaced at 6-year intervals, even if it has
never been used.
A tire's age can be determined by the DOT
stamp on the sidewall (see the illustration).
A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discoloration
should be replaced immediately.
Tread wear indicator
G020323
The tires have wear indicator strips running
across or parallel to the tread. The letters TWI
are printed on the side of the tire. When
approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on the
tread, these strips become visible and indi-
cate that the tire should be replaced. Tires
with less than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very
poor traction.
When replacing worn tires, it is recommended
that the tire be identical in type (radial) and
size as the one being replaced. Using a tire of
the same make (manufacturer) will prevent
alteration of the driving characteristics of the
vehicle.
Improving tire economy
Maintain correct tire pressure (see the
inflation pressure table on page 183).
Drive smoothly: avoid fast starts, hard
braking and tire screeching.
Tire wear increases with speed.
Correct front wheel alignment is very
important.
Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy
and driving comfort.
Tires must maintain the same direction of
rotation throughout their lifetime.
When replacing tires, the tires with the
most tread should be mounted on the
rear wheels to reduce the chance of over-
steer during hard braking.
Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the
tires and/or wheels permanently.
Summer and winter tires
G020325
The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the
tire
When switching between summer and
winter tires, mark the tires to indicate
where they were mounted on the car,
e.g., LF = left front, RR = right rear
Tires with tread designed to roll in only
one direction are marked with an arrow
on the sidewall.
1
Option or accessory on some models
07 Wheels and tires
General information
07
180
Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's
braking properties and ability to force
aside rain, snow and slush.
The tires with the most tread should
always be at the rear (to reduce the risk of
skidding).
Contact a Volvo workshop if you are
unsure about the tread depth.
Storing wheels and tires
When storing complete wheels (tires mounted
on rims), they should be suspended off the
floor or placed on their sides on the floor.
Tires not mounted on rims should be stored
on their sides or standing upright, but should
not be suspended.
CAUTION
Tires should preferably be stored in a cool,
dry, dark place, and should never be
stored in close proximity to solvents, gaso-
line, oils, etc.
WARNING
The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo
are specified to meet stringent stability
and handling requirements. Unap-
proved wheel/tire size combinations
can negatively affect your vehicle's
stability and handling.
Any damage caused by installation of
unapproved wheel/tire size combina-
tions will not be covered by your new
vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no
responsibility for death, injury, or
expenses that may result from such
installations.
07 Wheels and tires
Tire inflation
07
181
Inflation placard
G032513
Tire inflation placard
Check tire inflation pressure regularly.
A table listing the recommended inflation
pressure for your vehicle can be found on
page 183. A tire inflation pressure placard is
also located on the driver's side B-pillar (the
structural member at the side of the vehicle,
at the rear of the driver's door opening). This
placard indicates the designation of the fac-
tory-mounted tires on your vehicle, as well as
load limits and inflation pressure.
NOTE
The placards shown indicate inflation pres-
sure for the tires installed on the vehicle at
the factory only.
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation
pressure, including the spare, at least
once a month and before long trips. You
are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire
pressure gauge, as automatic service sta-
tion gauges may be inaccurate.
Use the recommended cold inflation
pressure for optimum tire performance
and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation may
cause uneven treadwear patterns.
WARNING
Under-inflation is the most common
cause of tire failure and may result in
severe tire cracking, tread separation,
or "blow-out," with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk of
injury.
Under-inflated tires reduce the load
carrying capacity of your vehicle.
When weather temperature changes occur,
tire inflation pressures also change. A 10-
degree temperature drop causes a corres-
ponding drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pres-
sure. Check your tire pressures frequently
and adjust them to the proper pressure,
which can be found on the vehicle's tire infor-
mation placard or certification label.
Checking tire pressure
A certain amount of air seepage from the tires
occurs naturally and tire pressure fluctuates
with seasonal changes in temperature.
Always check tire pressure regularly.
Cold tires
Inflation pressure should be checked when
the tires are cold.
The tires are considered to be cold when
they have the same temperature as the
surrounding (ambient) air.
This temperature is normally reached after the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours.
After driving a distance of approximately
1 mile (1.6 km), the tires are considered to be
hot. If you have to drive farther than this dis-
tance to pump your tire(s), check and record
the tire pressure first and add the appropriate
air pressure when you get to the pump.
If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot,
never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The
tires are hot from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above recommended
07 Wheels and tires
Tire inflation
07
182
cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recom-
mended cold inflation pressure could be sig-
nificantly under-inflated.
To check inflation pressure:
1. Remove the cap from the valve on one
tire, then firmly press the tire gauge onto
the valve.
2. Add air to reach the recommended air
pressure.
3. Reinstall the valve cap.
CAUTION
After pumping the tires, always reinstall
the valve cap to help avoid damage to
the valve from dirt, gravel, etc.
Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.
4. Visually inspect the tires to make sure
there are no nails or other objects
embedded that could puncture the tire
and cause an air leak.
5. Check the sidewalls to make sure there
are no gouges, cuts, bulges or other
irregularities.
6. Repeat this procedure for each tire,
including the spare.
NOTE
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the cen-
ter of the valve. Then recheck the
pressure with your tire gauge.
Some spare tires require higher infla-
tion pressure than the other tires. Con-
sult the tire inflation pressure table on
page 183 or see the inflation pressure
placard.
Speed ratings
The speed ratings in the table translate as fol-
low:
Speed ratings
M 81 mph (130 km/h)
Q 100 mph (160 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
Speed ratings
W 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y 186 mph (300 km/h)
Load ratings
See page 184 for an explanation of the load
rating on the sidewall of the tire.
07 Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure table
07
183
The following tire pressures are recom-
mended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to
the tire inflation placard (see page 181 for its
location) for information specific to the tires
installed on your vehicle at the factory.
Tire size Cold tire pressure up to five persons psi (kPa)
Front
psi (kPa)
Rear
psi (kPa)
235/65 R17
235/60 R18
255/50 R19
255/45 R20
36 (250) 36 (250)
Temporary spare tire
T125/80R17
61 (420) 61 (420)
NOTE
Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts
department for the most up-to-date speci-
fications.
07 Wheels and tires
Tire designations
07
184
1
2
3
4
5
6
12
11
10
8
7 9
G026442
Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers
place standardized information on the side-
wall of all tires (see the illustration).
The following information is listed on the tire
sidewall:
The tire designation:
NOTE
Please be aware that the following tire
designation is an example only and that
this particular tire may not be available on
your vehicle.
215: the width of the tire (in millimeters)
from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The
larger the number, the wider the tire.
65: The ratio of the tire's height to its
width in percent.
R: Radial tire (the designation RF and the
symbol indicate that the vehicle is
equipped with optional self-supporting
run flat tires
1
. See page 205 for more
information about these tires).
15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in
inches).
95: The tire's load index. In this example,
a load index of 95 equals a maximum
load of 1521 lbs (690 kg).
H: The tire's speed rating, or the maxi-
mum speed at which the tire is designed
to be driven for extended periods of time,
carrying a permissible load for the vehi-
cle, and with correct inflation pressure.
For example, H indicates a speed rating
of 130 mph (210 km/h).
NOTE
The tire's load index and speed rating may
not appear on the sidewall because they
are not required by law.
M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow; AT = All
Terrain; AS = All Season
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
(TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT"
and indicates that the tire meets all fed-
eral standards. The next two numbers or
letters are the plant code where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire
size code and the last four numbers rep-
resent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, 1510 means that the
tire was manufactured during week 15 of
2010. The numbers in between are mar-
keting codes used at the manufacturer's
discretion. This information helps a tire
manufacturer identify a tire for safety
recall purposes.
Tire Ply Composition and Material
Used: Indicates the number of plies indi-
cates or the number of layers of rubber-
coated fabric in the tire tread and side-
wall. Tire manufacturers also must indi-
cate the ply materials in the tire and the
sidewall, which include steel, nylon, poly-
ester, and others.
1
Self-supporting run flat tires may not be available on all models
07 Wheels and tires
Tire designations
07
185
Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum
load in pounds and kilograms that can be
carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's
tire information placard located on the B-
Pillar or the driver's door for the correct
tire pressure for your vehicle.
Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature
grades: see page 189 for more informa-
tion.
Maximum permissible inflation
pressure: the greatest amount of air
pressure that should ever be put in the
tire. This limit is set by the tire manufac-
turer.
Tire suppliers may have additional markings,
notes or warnings such as standard load,
radial tubeless, etc.
07 Wheels and tires
Glossary of tire terminology
07
186
Tire information placard: A placard
showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire
sizes, recommended inflation pressure,
and the maximum weight the vehicle can
carry.
Tire Identification Number (TIN): A
number on the sidewall of each tire pro-
viding information about the tire brand
and manufacturing plant, tire size and
date of manufacturer.
Inflation pressure: A measure of the
amount of air in a tire.
Standard load: A class of P-metric or
Metric tires designed to carry a maximum
load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric
tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not increase the
tires load carrying capability.
Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric
tires designed to carry a heavier maxi-
mum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for
Metric tires]. Increasing the inflation pres-
sure beyond this pressure will not
increase the tires load carrying capability.
kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres-
sure.
PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard
unit of air pressure.
B-pillar: The structural member at the
side of the vehicle behind the front door.
Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire
next to the rim.
Sidewall of the tire: Area between the
bead area and the tread.
Tread area of the tire: Area of the perim-
eter of the tire that contacts the road
when mounted on the vehicle.
Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire
or a tire and tube assembly upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Maximum load rating: a figure indicating
the maximum load in pounds and kilo-
grams that can be carried by the tire. This
rating is established by the tire manufac-
turer.
Maximum permissible inflation pres-
sure: the greatest amount of air pressure
that should ever be put in the tire. This
limit is set by the tire manufacturer.
Recommended tire inflation pressure:
inflation pressure, established by Volvo,
which is based on the type of tires that
are mounted on a vehicle at the factory.
This information can be found on the tire
inflation placard(s) located on the driver's
side B-pillar and in the tire inflation table
in this chapter.
Cold tires: The tires are considered to be
cold when they have the same tempera-
ture as the surrounding (ambient) air. This
temperature is normally reached after the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours.
07 Wheels and tires
Vehicle loading
07
187
Properly loading your vehicle will provide
maximum return of vehicle design perform-
ance.
Before loading your vehicle, familiarize your-
self with the following terms for determining
your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without
a trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/ Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/
CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire informa-
tion placard.
Curb weight
The weight of the vehicle including a full tank
of fuel and all standard equipment. It does
not include passengers, cargo, or optional
equipment.
Capacity weight
All weight added to the curb weight, including
cargo and optional equipment. When towing,
trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo
weight.
NOTE
For trailer towing information, please refer
to the section "Towing a trailer."
Permissible axle weight
The maximum allowable weight that can be
carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/
CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle
must never exceed its maximum permissible
weight.
Gross vehicle weight (GVW)
The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passen-
gers.
A table listing important weight limits for your
vehicle, is in chapter "Dimension and
weights".
For the location of the various labels in your
vehicle, see page 282
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
Locate the statement "the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX pounds" on your vehi-
cle's placard.
Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kilo-
grams or XXX pounds.
The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the "XXX"
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
Determine the combined weight of lug-
gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-
cle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual
1
to deter-
mine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
1
For "Towing a trailer" see page 164.
07 Wheels and tires
Vehicle loading
07
188
WARNING
Exceeding the permissible axle weight,
gross vehicle weight, or any other
weight rating limits can cause tire
overheating resulting in permanent
deformation or catastrophic failure.
Do not use replacement tires with
lower load carrying capacities than the
tires that were original equipment on
the vehicle because this will lower the
vehicle's GVW rating. Use only tires
with the correct load carrying capacity.
Consult your Volvo retailer for informa-
tion.
07 Wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
07
189
ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST
CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY
REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE
GRADES
Quality grades can be found, where appli-
cable, on the tire sidewall between the
tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
TREADWEAR
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tes-
ted under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one half (1
1/2) times as well on the government course
as a tire graded 100. The relative perform-
ance of tires depends upon the actual condi-
tions of their use, however, and many depart
significantly from the norm due to variation in
driving habits, maintenance practices and dif-
ferences in road characteristics and climate.
TRACTION
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C, as measured under con-
trolled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on braking (straight-ahead) traction
tests and is not a measure of cornering
(turning) traction.
TEMPERATURE
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissi-
pate heat when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a minimum level of perform-
ance that all passenger vehicle tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Safety Stand-
ard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly infla-
ted and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and tire failure.
07 Wheels and tires
Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires
07
190
Snow chains
Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with
the following restrictions:
Snow chains should be installed on front
wheels only. Use only Volvo approved
snow chains.
If accessory, aftermarket or "custom"
tires and wheels are installed and are of a
size different than the original tires and
wheels, chains in some cases CANNOT
be used. Sufficient clearances between
chains and brakes, suspension and body
components must be maintained.
Some strap-on type chains will interfere
with brake components and therefore
CANNOT be used.
All Wheel Drive models: Snow chains
should only be installed on the front
wheels.
Certain size tires may not allow the
assembly of snow chains/traction devi-
ces.
Consult your Volvo retailer for additional
snow chain information.
CAUTION
Check local regulations regarding the
use of snow chains before installing.
Always follow the chain manufactur-
er's installation instructions carefully.
Install chains as tightly as possible and
retighten periodically.
Never exceed the chain manufactur-
er's specified maximum speed limit.
(Under no circumstances should you
exceed 31 mph (50 km/h)).
Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns
when driving with snow chains.
The handling of the vehicle can be
adversely affected when driving with
chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as
well as locked wheel braking.
Snow tires, studded tires
1
Tires for winter use:
Owners who live in or regularly commute
through areas with sustained periods of
snow or icy driving conditions are
strongly advised to fit suitable winter tires
to help retain the highest degree of trac-
tion.
It is important to install winter tires on all
four wheels to help retain traction during
cornering, braking, and accelerating. Fail-
ure to do so could reduce traction to an
unsafe level or adversely affect handling.
Do not mix tires of different design as this
could also negatively affect overall tire
road grip.
Winter tires wear more quickly on dry
roads in warm weather. They should be
removed when the winter driving season
has ended.
Studded tires should be run-in
300-600 miles (500-1000 km) during
which the vehicle should be driven as
smoothly as possible to give the studs
the opportunity to seat properly in the
tires. The tires should have the same
rotational direction throughout their entire
lifetime.
NOTE
Please consult state or provincial regula-
tions restricting the use of studded winter
tires before installing such tires.
1
Where permitted
07 Wheels and tires
Temporary spare
07
191
The spare tire in your vehicle
1
is called a
"Temporary Spare".
Recommended tire pressure (see the placard
on the B-pillar or on the fuel filler door) should
be maintained irrespective of which position
on the vehicle the temporary spare tire is
used.
In the event of damage to this tire, a new one
can be purchased from your Volvo retailer.
WARNING
Current legislation prohibits the use of the
"Temporary Spare" tire other than as a
temporary replacement for a punctured
tire. It must be replaced as soon as possi-
ble by a standard tire. Road holding and
handling may be affected with the "Tem-
porary Spare" in use. Do not exceed
50 mph (80 km/h).
CAUTION
The vehicle must not be driven with wheels
of different dimensions or with a spare tire
other than the one that came with the vehi-
cle. The use of different size wheels can
seriously damage your vehicle's transmis-
sion.
1
Not on models equipped with the Tire sealing system.
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
07
192
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Introduction
Certain models are equipped with a tire seal-
ing system* that enables you to temporarily
seal a hole in the tread surface and re-inflate
a flat tire, or to adjust a tire’s inflation pres-
sure.
The system consists of an air compressor, a
container for the sealing compound, wiring to
connect the system to the vehicle’s electrical
system via one of the 12-volt sockets, and a
hose used to connect the system to the tire’s
inflation valve.
NOTE
The tire sealing system's compressor has
been tested and approved by Volvo.
The 12-volt sockets are located on the rear
side of the center console (in the rear seat)
and in the cargo area.
Accessing the tire sealing system
The tire sealing system is stowed under the
floor of the cargo area. To access it:
1. Fold up or remove any protective floor
covering or carpet.
2. Open the floor hatch.
3. Lift out the tire sealing system.
NOTE
The tire sealing system is only
intended to seal holes on the tire’s
tread area, not the sidewall.
Tires with large holes or tears cannot
be repaired with the tire sealing sys-
tem.
After use, stow the tire sealing system
properly to help prevent rattling.
WARNING
After using the tire sealing system, the
vehicle should not be driven farther
than approximately 120 miles (200
km).
Have the tire inspected by a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician
as soon as possible to determine if it
can be permanently repaired or must
be replaced.
The vehicle should not be driven faster
than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a
tire that has been temporarily repaired
with the tire sealing system.
After using the tire sealing system,
drive carefully and avoid abrupt steer-
ing maneuvers and sudden stops.
Tire sealing system–overview
Speed limit sticker (on the rear side of the
compressor)
On/Off switch
Electrical wire
Bottle holder (orange cover)
Protective hose cover
Air pressure release knob
Hose
Bottle with sealing compound
Air pressure gauge
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
07
193
WARNING
Please keep the following points in mind
when using the tire sealing system:
The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in
the illustration) contains 1) rubber
latex, natural and 2) ethanediol. These
substances are harmful if swallowed.
The contents of this bottle may cause
allergic skin reactions or otherwise be
potentially harmful to the respiratory
tract, the skin, the central nervous sys-
tem, and the eyes.
Precautions:
Keep out of reach of children.
Do not ingest the contents.
Avoid prolonged or repeated contact
with the skin.
Wash thoroughly after handling.
First aid:
Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with
soap and water. Get medical attention
if symptoms occur.
Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for
least 15 minutes, occasionally lifting
the upper and lower eyelids. Get medi-
cal attention if symptoms occur.
Inhalation: Move the exposed person
to fresh air. If irritation persists, get
medical attention.
Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting
unless directed to do so by medical
personnel. Get medical attention.
Disposal: Dispose of this material and
its container to a hazardous or special
waste collection point.
NOTE
Do not break the seal on the bottle. This
occurs automatically when the bottle is
screwed into the holder.
Tire sealing system–temporarily
repairing a flat tire
Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in two
stages:
Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumping
sealing compound into the tire. The car is
then driven a short distance to distribute
the sealing compound in the tire.
NOTE
Do not remove any foreign objects (nails,
etc.) from the tire before using the sealing
system.
Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure is
checked and adjusted if necessary.
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
07
194
WARNING
Never leave the tire sealing system
unattended when it is operating.
Keep the tire sealing system away
from children.
Be sure the vehicle is parked safely off
the road and away from moving traffic.
Apply the parking brake.
Stage 1: Sealing the hole
1. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it
to the steering wheel hub where it will be
clearly visible to the driver.
2. Ensure that the on/off switch is in position
0 (the 0 side of the switch should be
pressed down).
3. Put on the gloves included in the tire
sealing system.
WARNING
Contact with the sealing compound may
cause skin irritation. If contact occurs,
wash the affected area immediately with
soap and water.
4. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle
holder and unscrew the cap on the bottle
of sealing compound.
NOTE
Do not break the seal on the bottle. This
occurs automatically when the bottle is
screwed into the holder.
5. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder.
WARNING
The bottle is equipped with a catch to
keep it securely in place and help prevent
sealing compound leakage. Once in place,
the bottle cannot be unscrewed. This must
be done by a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician.
6. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s
inflation valve and screw the tire sealing
system’s hose connector onto the valve
as tightly as possible by hand.
7. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest
12-volt socket in the vehicle.
NOTE
Be sure that none of the other 12-volt
sockets is being used while the compres-
sor is in operation.
8. Start the vehicle’s engine.
9. Start the tire sealing system’s compres-
sor by pressing the on/off switch to posi-
tion I.
WARNING
Never stand next to the tire being infla-
ted when the compressor is in opera-
tion.
If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire,
switch off the compressor immediately.
If there is visible damage to the sidewall
or the rim, the tire cannot be repaired.
The vehicle should not be driven if this
occurs. Contact a towing service or
Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance if
applicable.
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
07
195
NOTE
The air pressure gauge will temporarily
show an increase in pressure to approxi-
mately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing
compound is being pumped into the tire.
The pressure should return to a normal
level after approximately 30 seconds.
10. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire to
between 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar).
Switch off the compressor briefly to get a
clear reading from the pressure gauge.
CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for
more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid
overheating.
WARNING
If the pressure remains below 22 psi
(1.8 bar) after approximately seven
minutes, turn off the compressor. In this
case, the hole is too large to be sealed and
the vehicle should not be driven.
11. Switch off the compressor and discon-
nect the electrical wire from the 12-volt
socket.
12. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation
valve and reinstall the valve cap.
CAUTION
After pumping the tires, always reinstall
the valve cap to help avoid damage to
the valve from dirt, gravel, etc.
Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.
13. Immediately drive the vehicle for approxi-
mately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum
speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute
the sealing compound in the tire.
CAUTION
If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), the
use of the sealing compound may lead to
incorrect tire pressure readings or in rare
cases, damage to the tire pressure sensor.
Use the tire sealing system to check and
adjust the damaged tire's inflation pres-
sure.
NOTE
Safely stow the tire sealing system in a
convenient place as it will soon be
used again to check the tire’s inflation
pressure.
The empty bottle of sealing compound
cannot be removed from the bottle
holder. Consult a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician to have the
bottle removed and properly disposed
of.
WARNING
If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering
behavior, or noises should occur while
driving, reduce speed and park the vehicle
in a safe place. Recheck the tire for
bumps, cracks, or other visible damage,
and recheck its inflation pressure. If the
pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not
continue driving. Have the vehicle towed
to a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure
1. Connect the tire sealing system as
described in stage 1.
2. Refer to the inflation pressure tables for
the correct inflation pressure. If the tire
needs to be inflated, start the tire sealing
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
07
196
system’s compressor. If necessary,
release air from the tire by turning the air
release knob counterclockwise.
CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for
more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid
overheating.
WARNING
If you interrupt your trip for more than 1
hour, check the inflation pressure in the
damaged tire again before continuing.
Replacing the sealing compound
container
The sealing compound container must be
replaced if:
the tire sealing system has been used to
repair a tire
the container’s expiration date has
passed (see the date on decal).
NOTE
After use, the sealing compound bot-
tle, the hose, and certain other system
components must be replaced. Please
consult your Volvo retailer for replace-
ment parts.
If the sealing compound bottle’s expi-
ration date has passed, please take it
to a Volvo retailer or a recycling station
that can properly dispose of harmful
substances.
Inflating tires
The tire sealing system can be used to inflate
the tires. To do so:
1. Park the car in a safe place.
2. The compressor should be switched off.
Ensure that the on/off switch is in position
0 (the 0 side of the switch should be
pressed down).
3. Take out the electrical wire and hose.
4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s
inflation valve and screw the hose con-
nector onto the valve as tightly as possi-
ble by hand.
5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest
12-volt socket in the vehicle.
6. Start the vehicle’s engine.
WARNING
The vehicle’s engine should be running
when the tire sealing system is used to
avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure
the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated
place, or outdoors, before using the
system. The parking brake should be
securely applied and the gear selector
should be in the P (park) position.
Children should never be left unatten-
ded in the vehicle when the engine is
running.
7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on the
gauge. Switch off the compressor briefly
to get a clear reading from the pressure
gauge.
8. Refer to the tire inflation tables for the
correct inflation pressure. If the tire needs
to be inflated, start the tire sealing sys-
tem’s compressor (press the on/off
switch to position I). If necessary, release
air from the tire by turning the air release
knob counterclockwise.
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Sealing System
07
197
CAUTION
The compressor should not be used for
more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid
overheating.
9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/off
switch to position 0) when the correct
inflation pressure has been reached.
10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation
valve and reinstall the valve cap.
CAUTION
After pumping the tires, always reinstall
the valve cap to help avoid damage to
the valve from dirt, gravel, etc.
Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps
could corrode and become difficult to
remove.
11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the
12-volt socket.
07 Wheels and tires
Changing wheels
07
198
G030879
Jack location
Changing wheels
Location of the jack
The jack is located in the center under the
rear hatch in the cargo area floor. Lift this
hatch and release the retaining strap to slide
out the jack.
The rear section of the jack's crank and the
tool bag are stowed in the foam block. The
front (hook) section of the crank is stored in
the tool bag.
The rear section of the crank is stored in the
foam block.
If the vehicle is equipped with the optional
grocery bag holder, fold up the rear section of
the cargo area floor, disconnect the grocery
bag holder's retaining cords and fold up the
lower section of the floor.
NOTE
The rear section of the crank is enclosed in
a protective sleeve that should be slid off
before the crank is used. We recommend
reinserting the crank into this sleeve before
the crank is stowed.
CAUTION
Seven-seat models: Do not store objects
in the area for the rear seat cushions
(when the backrests are to be folded
down). This could damage the cushions.
Lowering the spare wheel
The spare wheel is located under the floor of
the rear cargo compartment. It can be low-
ered using the crank.
07 Wheels and tires
Changing wheels
07
199
WARNING
When raising or lowering the spare wheel,
please keep in mind that components in
the exhaust system may be very hot.
To lower the spare wheel:
1. Fold down the lower section of the tail-
gate.
2. Fold up the rear section of the floor in the
cargo compartment.
3. Connect the two sections of the jack's
crank.
4. Insert the hooked end of the crank in the
spare wheel retaining attachment.
5. Lower the spare wheel under the vehicle
by turning the crank counterclockwise
until it is not possible to turn it further.
6. Pivot the toggle at the end of the cable 90
degrees to release it from the spare wheel
CAUTION
When the spare wheel is mounted on the
vehicle, the retaining cable could damage
the underside of the vehicle if it is not
retracted.
7. Crank up the cable again by turning the
crank clockwise.
8. Place the wheel with the flat tire in the
vehicle's cargo compartment.
NOTE
The space under the vehicle is designed to
hold the special spare wheel only. Other
full-size wheels will not fit in this compart-
ment.
G026996
Returning the spare wheel to the
storage compartment
1. Use the crank (turn it counterclockwise)
to lower the spare wheel's retaining
cable.
2. Pass the toggle at the end of the cable
through the center hole in the spare
wheel. Pivot the toggle 90 degrees so
that when raised, the wheel will rest on
the toggle.
3. Retract the retaining cable slightly by
slowly turning the crank clockwise several
times.
4. Position the wheel so that it is not
obstructed by components in the exhaust
system.
5. Continue to raise the wheel by turning the
crank clockwise. Raise the wheel a little
bit at a time and guide it around the rear
axle until it is securely seated in the stor-
age area.
6. When it is no longer possible to turn the
crank any further, check that the spare
wheel is securely in position in the stor-
age compartment.
07 Wheels and tires
Changing wheels
07
200
G026997
Jack attachment points
Jack attachments
There are two attachment points for the jack
on each side of the vehicle. These attachment
points are under the center of each door.
WARNING
There is an attachment point on each side
of the vehicle located under the pillars
between the front and rear doors. This
point is used during the production proc-
ess only, and is NOT intended for attach-
ing the jack.
G020332
WARNING
The undersides of accessory running
boards are not intended for attaching the
jack.
Changing a wheel
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level, non-slip-
pery surface.
2. Engage the parking brake and put the
gear selector in the Park position.
3. Loosen the wheel bolts by exerting down-
ward pressure on the lug wrench.
4. Remove the wheel cover (where applica-
ble) using the lug wrench in the tool bag.
5. With the wheels still on the ground, use
the lug wrench to loosen the wheel bolts
½ – 1 turn. Turn the bolts counterclock-
wise to loosen the bolts.
G027000
Attaching the jack
6. Place the jack on the ground, under one
of the attachment points (see the illustra-
tion) and crank while simultaneously guid-
ing the jack's attachment bracket onto
the attachment point (see illustration) The
base of the jack must be flat on a level,
firm, non-slippery surface. Before raising
07 Wheels and tires
Changing wheels
07
201
the vehicle, check that the jack is still cor-
rectly positioned in the attachment.
7. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be
changed is lifted off the ground.
8. Unscrew the wheel bolts completely and
carefully remove the wheel so as not to
damage the threads on the studs.
NOTE
To avoid excessive wear and the necessity
of rebalancing, mark and reinstall wheels
in the same location and position as before
removal. To lessen the chance of imbal-
ance, each wheel hub is equipped with a
guide stud to ensure that a removed wheel
can be reinstalled in its original position (as
when changing over to winter tires/
wheels).
CAUTION
The vehicle must not be driven with
wheels of different dimensions or with
a spare tire other than the one that
came with the vehicle. The use of dif-
ferent size wheels can seriously dam-
age your vehicle's transmission.
Correct tightening torque on wheel
bolts must be observed.
The wheel bolts should never be
greased or lubricated.
Extended, chromed wheel bolts must
not be used with steel rims, as they
make it impossible to fit the hub caps.
Installing the wheel
1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel
and hub.
2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub.
3. Install the wheel bolts and tighten hand-
tight. Using the lug wrench, tighten cross-
wise until all bolts are snug.
4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alter-
nately tighten the bolts crosswise to
103 ft.lbs. (140 Nm).
5. Install the wheel cover (where applicable).
WARNING
The jack must correctly engage the bar
in the jack attachment. The vehicle's
weight must not rest on the jack
attachment. See illustration "Attaching
the jack" on the previous page.
Be sure the jack is on a firm, level,
non-slippery surface.
Never allow any part of your body to
be extended under a vehicle suppor-
ted by a jack.
Use the jack intended for the vehicle
when replacing a wheel. For any other
job, use stands to support the side of
the vehicle being worked on.
Apply the parking brake and put the
gear selector in the (P)ark position.
Block the wheels standing on the
ground, use rigid wooden blocks or
large stones.
The jack should be kept well-greased
and clean, and should not be dam-
aged.
No objects should be placed between
the base of jack and the ground, or
between the jack and the attachment
bar on the vehicle.
07 Wheels and tires
Changing wheels
07
202
NOTE
The jack provided with your vehicle is
intended to be used only in temporary sit-
uations such as changing wheels in the
event of a flat tire. Only the jack that came
with your particular model should be used
to lift the vehicle. If the vehicle needs to be
lifted more frequently or for a prolonged
period, using a garage jack or hoist is rec-
ommended. Always follow this device’s
instructions for use.
The jack and tools should be returned to their
storage spaces. The jack should be cranked
down fully so that it fits into the intended
space.
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
07
203
The tire pressure monitoring system
1
uses
sensors mounted in the tire valves to check
inflation pressure levels. When the vehicle is
moving at a speed of approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h) or faster, these sensors transmit
inflation pressure data to a receiver located in
the vehicle.
USA – FCC ID: MRXG403MA4
A
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
When low inflation pressure is detected,
TPMS will light up the tire pressure warn-
ing light (also referred to as a telltale) in the
instrument panel (see page 61), and will
display a message in the text window. The
wording of this message is determined by
the degree of inflation pressure loss.
A
On certain models, the FCC code is MRXTG315AM04
When low inflation pressure is detected,
TPMS will light up the tire pressure warning
light
(also referred to as a telltale) in the
instrument panel and will display one of the
following messages in the text window:
LOW
TIRE PRESS. CHECK TIRES or VERY LOW
TIRE PRESSURE.
NOTE
If a fault occurs in TPMS, the tire pressure
warning light will flash for approximately
1 minute and
TIRE PRESS SYST
SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitor-
ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu-
minates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle's handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-
er's responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-
tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-
minated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace-
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehi-
cle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
1
This system is standard on U.S. models and optional on Canadian models
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
07
204
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunc-
tion telltale after replacing one or more tires
or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function prop-
erly.
NOTE
TPMS indicates low tire pressure but does
not replace normal tire maintenance. For
information on correct tire pressure, please
refer to the tire inflation pressure table in
this chapter or consult your Volvo retailer.
Erasing warning messages
When a low tire pressure warning message
has been displayed, and the tire pressure
warning light has come on:
1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the
inflation pressure of all four tires.
2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pres-
sure (consult the tire pressure placard or
the table see page 183).
3. Drive the vehicle for several minutes at a
speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster.
> This will erase the warning text and the
warning light will go out.
WARNING
Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to
tire failure, resulting in a loss of control of
the vehicle.
Changing wheels with TPMS
Please note the following when changing or
replacing the factory installed TPMS wheels/
tires on the vehicle:
Only the factory-mounted wheels are
equipped with TPMS sensors in the
valves.
If the vehicle is equipped with a tempo-
rary spare tire, this tire does not have a
TPMS sensor.
If wheels without TPMS sensors are
mounted on the vehicle,
TIRE PRESS
SYST. SERVICE REQUIRED will be dis-
played each time the vehicle is driven
above 25 mph (40 km/h) for 10 minutes or
more.
Once TPMS sensors are properly instal-
led, the warning message should not
reappear.
Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors
be fitted on all wheels used on the vehi-
cle. Volvo does not recommend moving
sensors back and forth between sets of
wheels.
NOTE
If a tire is changed or if the TPMS sensor is
moved to another wheel, the sensor’s
valve and valve core should be replaced.
CAUTION
When inflating tires with TPMS valves,
press the pump's mouthpiece straight
onto the valve to help avoid bending or
otherwise damaging the valve.
Recalibrating TPMS (Canadian models
only)
In certain cases, it may be necessary to reca-
librate TPMS to conform to Volvo's recom-
mended tire inflation pressures (see the infla-
tion pressure table on page 183), for exam-
ple, if higher inflation pressure is necessary
when transporting heavy loads, etc.
To recalibrate:
1. Switch off the engine.
2. Inflate the tires to the desired pressure
and turn the ignition key to position I or II
(see page 145 for additional information).
3. Turn the thumb wheel on the left-side
steering wheel lever until
Tire pressure
Calibration appears in the display.
07 Wheels and tires
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
205
4. Press and hold the Reset button on the
left-side steering wheel lever until
TIRE
PRESSURE CALIBRATED is displayed.
Activating/deactivating TPMS
(Canadian models only)
1. Switch off the engine.
2. Turn the ignition key to position I or II.
3. Press and hold the Reset button on the
left-side steering wheel lever until
TIRE
PRESS SYST OFF is displayed.
Repeat steps 1-3 to turn TPMS on again.
Self-supporting run flat tires (SST)*
Self-supporting run flat tires are available as
optional equipment. The vehicle must be
equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) if tires of this type are instal-
led.
Tires of this type have specially reinforced
sidewalls that make it possible to continue
driving to a limited extent even though the tire
has lost some or all of its inflation pressure.
These tires are mounted on special rims (nor-
mal tires can also be mounted on these rims).
If an SST tire loses inflation pressure, the yel-
low TPMS symbol illuminates in the instru-
ment panel and a text message is also dis-
played. If this happens, reduce speed to not
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). The tire should
be replaced as soon as possible.
Drive carefully; it may be difficult to determine
which tire is damaged. To find the damaged
tire, check the inflation pressure in all four
tires.
WARNING
SST tires should only be mounted by
service technicians who are familiar
with tires of this type.
SST tires may only be mounted on
vehicles equipped with TPMS.
Do not drive faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h) if TPMS indicates that a tire
has lost inflation pressure.
Do not drive farther than 50 miles
(80 km) before replacing a damaged
SST tire.
Drive carefully and avoid e.g., hard
braking or fast turns.
SST tires must be replaced if they are
damaged. A tire of this type cannot be
repaired.
206
Washing and cleaning the vehicle........................................................ 208
Paint touch up....................................................................................... 213
C A R C A R E
08 Car care
Washing and cleaning the vehicle
08
208
Washing
The vehicle should be washed at regular
intervals since dirt, dust, insects and tar
spots adhere to the paint and may cause
damage. It is particularly important to
wash the vehicle frequently in the winter-
time to prevent corrosion, when salt has
been used on the roads.
When washing the vehicle, do not expose
it to direct sunlight. Use lukewarm water
to soften the dirt before you wash with a
sponge, and plenty of water, to avoid
scratching.
Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork
as soon as possible. Otherwise the finish
may be permanently damaged.
A detergent can be used to facilitate the
softening of dirt and oil.
CAUTION
Chromed wheels: Clean chrome-plated
wheels using the same detergents used for
the body of the vehicle. Aggressive wheel
cleaning agents can permanently stain
chrome-plated wheels.
Dry the vehicle with a clean chamois and
remember to clean the drain holes in the
doors and rocker panels.
Tar spots can be removed with tar
remover after the vehicle has been
washed.
A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy
water can be used to clean the wiper
blades. Frequent cleaning of the wind-
shield and wiper blades improves visibility
considerably and also helps prolong the
service life of the wiper blades.
Wash off the dirt from the underside
(wheel housings, fenders, etc.).
In areas of high industrial fallout, more
frequent washing is recommended.
Suitable detergents
Special vehicle washing detergents should be
used. A suitable mixture is about 2.5 fl. oz.
(8.5 cl) of detergent to 2.6 US gal. (10 liters) of
warm water. After washing with a detergent
the vehicle should be well rinsed with clean
water.
CAUTION
Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or
rubber components
Polishing chromed strips can wear
away or damage the surface
Polishes containing abrasive sub-
stances should not be used
CAUTION
Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can
reduce lighting capacity considerably.
Clean the headlights regularly, for
example when refueling.
During high pressure washing, the
spray mouthpiece must never be
closer to the vehicle than 13 " (30 cm).
Do not spray into the locks.
Special moonroof cautions:
Always close the moonroof and sun
shade before washing your vehicle.
Never use abrasive cleaning agents on
the moonroof.
Never use wax on the rubber seals
around the moonroof.
08 Car care
Washing and cleaning the vehicle
08
209
Exterior components
Volvo recommends the use of special clean-
ing products, available at your Volvo retailer,
for cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or orna-
mental components such as chromed strips
on the exterior of your vehicle. The instruc-
tions for using these products should be fol-
lowed carefully. Solvents or stain removers
should not be used.
CAUTION
Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or
rubber components
Polishing chromed strips can wear
away or damage the surface
Polishes containing abrasive sub-
stances should not be used
NOTE
When washing the vehicle, remember to
remove dirt from the drain holes in the
doors and sills.
WARNING
When the vehicle is driven immediately
after being washed, apply the brakes
several times in order to remove any
moisture from the brake linings.
Engine cleaning agents should not be
used when the engine is warm. This
constitutes a fire risk.
Automatic washing – simple and quick
We do NOT recommend washing your
vehicle in an automatic wash during the
first few months (because the paint will
not have hardened sufficiently).
An automatic wash is a simple and quick
way to clean your vehicle, but it is worth
remembering that it may not be as thor-
ough as when you yourself go over the
vehicle with sponge and water. Keeping
the underbody clean is most important,
especially in the winter. Some automatic
washers do not have facilities for washing
the underbody.
Before driving into an automatic car
wash, make sure that side view mirrors,
auxiliary lamps, etc, are secure, and that
any antenna(s) are retracted or removed.
Otherwise there is risk of the machine
dislodging them.
Exterior lighting
Condensation may form temporarily on the
inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as
headlights, fog lights, or tail lights. This is nor-
mal and the lights are designed to withstand
moisture. Normally, condensation will dissi-
pate after the lights have been on for a short
time.
Polishing and waxing
Normally, polishing is not required during
the first year after delivery, however, wax-
ing may be beneficial.
Before applying polish or wax the vehicle
must be washed and dried. Tar spots can
be removed with kerosene or tar remover.
Difficult spots may require a fine rubbing
compound.
After polishing use liquid or paste wax.
Several commercially available products
contain both polish and wax.
Waxing alone does not substitute for pol-
ishing a dull surface.
A wide range of polymer-based car
waxes can be purchased today. These
waxes are easy to use and produce a
long-lasting, high-gloss finish that pro-
08 Car care
Washing and cleaning the vehicle
08
210
tects the bodywork against oxidation,
road dirt and fading.
Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct
sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should
not be warmer than 113° F (45° C).
CAUTION
Volvo does not recommend the use of
long-life or durable paint protection coat-
ings, some of which may claim to prevent
pitting, fading, oxidation, etc. These coat-
ings have not been tested by Volvo for
compatibility with your vehicle's clear coat.
Some of them may cause the clear coat to
soften, crack, or cloud. Damage caused by
application of paint protection coatings
may not be covered under your vehicle's
paint warranty.
Mirrors with the water repellent glass
coating
Do not apply wax, degreasing agents, etc
to this glass. This could damage the coa-
ting.
Clean the glass surface with care to avoid
scratching.
NOTE
The water repellent coating is subject to
natural wear
In order to maintain the coating's water
repellent characteristics, it should be
treated with a special compound that is
available at your Volvo retailer.
This treatment should be carried out for
the first time after three years, and there-
after once a year.
Cleaning the upholstery
Fabric
Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For
more difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream,
shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/
fabric stain remover. Consult your Volvo
retailer.
Interior plastic components
Cleaning interior plastic components should
be done with a cleaning agent specially
designed for this purpose. Consult your Volvo
retailer.
Alcantera™ suede-like material
Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with a
soft cloth and mild soap solution.
Leather care
Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured
with a protectant to repel soiling. Over time,
sunlight, grease and dirt can break down the
protection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, and
fading can result.
Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy
leather care kit formulated to clean and beau-
tify your vehicle's leather, and to renew the
protective qualities of its finish. The cleaner
removes dirt and oil buildup. The light cream
protectant restores a barrier against soil and
sunlight.
Volvo also offers a special leather softener
that should be applied after the cleaner and
protectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth,
and reduces friction between leather and
other finishes in the vehicle.
Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and
conditioning your vehicle's leather two to four
times a year. Ask your Volvo retailer about
Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Soft-
ener 943 7429.
Cleaning leather upholstery
1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge
and squeeze it until the cleaner foams.
2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the
sponge with circular movements.
08 Car care
Washing and cleaning the vehicle
08
211
3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the
sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain,
do not rub.
4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a
towel, and allow the leather to dry com-
pletely.
Protecting leather upholstery
1. Put a small amount of protectant cream
on a cloth and apply a thin coating of
cream to the upholstery with light circular
movements.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes.
This will help the leather resist staining and
protect against sunlight's harmful UV rays.
CAUTION
Under no circumstances should gaso-
line, naphtha or similar cleaning agents
be used on the plastic or the leather
since these can cause damage.
Take extra care when removing stains
such as ink or lipstick since the color-
ing can spread.
Use solvents sparingly. Too much sol-
vent can damage the seat padding.
Start from the outside of the stain and
work toward the center.
Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a
pocket) or velcro fasteners on clothing
may damage the textile upholstery.
Clothing that is not colorfast, such as
new jeans or suede garments, may
stain the upholstery.
Cleaning a leather-covered steering
wheel
Remove soil, dust, etc., with a damp
sponge and a neutral soap solution.
Leather should be allowed to breath.
Never cover the steering wheel with a
plastic protector.
Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting
and conditioning the steering wheel with
Volvo's Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and
Leather Softener 943 7429.
If there are stains on the steering wheel:
Type 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat or
blood)
Use a soft cloth or sponge. Wipe the
wheel with a solution with 5% ammonia.
For blood stains, mix approx. 1 cup (2 dl)
of water and one ounce (25g) of salt and
wipe the stain.
Type 2 (fat, oil, sauces, or chocolate)
1. Same procedure as for type I stains.
2. Finish by rubbing the wheel with absorb-
ent paper or a towel.
Type 3 (dry soil or dust)
1. Remove the soil/dust with a soft brush.
2. Same procedure as for type I stains.
CAUTION
Sharp objects, such as rings, could dam-
age the leather on the steering wheel.
Cleaning the seat belts
Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild
soap solution.
Cleaning floor mats
The floor mats should be vacuumed or
brushed clean regularly, especially during
winter when they should be taken out for dry-
08 Car care
Washing and cleaning the vehicle
08
212
ing. Spots on textile mats can be removed
with a mild detergent.
08 Car care
Paint touch up
08
213
Model plate with paint color code (1).
1
Paint damage requires immediate attention to
avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the fin-
ish regularly – when washing the vehicle for
instance. Touch-up if necessary.
Paint repairs require special equipment and
skill. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician for any extensive damage.
Minor scratches can be repaired by using
Volvo touch-up paint.
Color code
Make sure you have the right color. The color
code number is on the model plate in the
engine compartment.
Minor stone chips and scratches
Material:
Primer – can
Paint – touch-up pen
Brush
Masking tape
If the stone chip has not gone down to
the bare metal and an undamaged color
coat remains, you can add paint immedi-
ately after removing dirt.
NOTE
When touching up the vehicle, it should be
clean and dry. The surface temperature
should be above 60° F (15° C).
Minor scratches on the surface
If the stone chip has not penetrated down to
the metal and an undamaged layer of paint
remains, the touch-up paint can be applied
as soon as the spot has been cleaned.
G020345
Deep scratches
Place a strip of masking tape over the
damaged surface. Pull the tape off so that
any loose flakes of paint adhere to it.
Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it
with a small brush. When the primer sur-
face is dry, the paint can be applied using
a brush. Mix the paint thoroughly; apply
several thin paint coats and let dry after
each application.
If there is a longer scratch, you may want to
protect surrounding paint by masking it off.
1
The model plate is located on the passenger's side center door pillar.
214
Volvo service......................................................................................... 216
Maintaining your vehicle....................................................................... 217
Working on your vehicle........................................................................ 219
Engine compartment............................................................................. 221
Engine oil............................................................................................... 222
Fluids..................................................................................................... 224
Wiper blades......................................................................................... 226
Battery................................................................................................... 227
Replacing bulbs.................................................................................... 230
Fuses..................................................................................................... 238
M A I N T E N A N C E A N D S E R V I C I N G
09 Maintenance and servicing
Volvo service
09
216
Maintenance service
Periodic maintenance will help keep your
vehicle running well. The maintenance serv-
ices contain several checks that require spe-
cial instruments and tools and therefore must
be performed by a qualified technician. To
keep your Volvo in top condition, specify
time-tested and proven Genuine Volvo Parts
and Accessories.
The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S.
The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle
manufacturers to furnish written instructions
to the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper
servicing and function of the components that
control emissions. These services, which are
listed in the "Warranty and Service Records
Information booklet," are not covered by the
warranty. You will be required to pay for labor
and material used.
Maintenance services
Your Volvo passed several major inspections
before it was delivered to you, in accordance
with Volvo specifications. The maintenance
services outlined in the Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet, many of which
will positively affect your vehicle's emissions,
should be performed as indicated. It is rec-
ommended that receipts for vehicle emission
services be retained in case questions arise
concerning maintenance.
Inspection and service should also be per-
formed anytime a malfunction is observed or
suspected.
Applicable warranties
In accordance with applicable U.S. and
Canadian regulations, the following list of
warranties is provided.
New Car Limited Warranty
Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty
Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty
Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint
Systems Limited Warranty
Emission Design and Defect Warranty
Emission Performance Warranty
NOTE
Refer to your Warranty and Service
Records Information booklet for a
comprehensive service and mainte-
nance schedule up to 150,000 miles
(240,000 km). This program contains
inspections and services necessary for
the proper function of your vehicle and
includes components that affect vehi-
cle emissions.
The Warranty and Service Records
Information booklet also contains
detailed information concerning the
warranties that apply to your vehicle.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Maintaining your vehicle
09
}}
217
Owner maintenance
Periodic maintenance requirements and inter-
vals are described in your vehicle's Warranty
and Service Records Information booklet.
The following points can be carried out
between the normally scheduled maintenance
services.
Each time the vehicle is refueled
Check the engine oil level
Clean the windshield, windshield wipers,
headlights, and tail lights
Monthly
Check cold tire pressure in all tires.
Inspect the tires for wear.
Check that engine coolant and other fluid
levels are between the indicated "min"
and "max" markings.
Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass
cleaner and soft paper towels.
Wipe driver information displays with a
soft cloth.
Visually inspect battery terminals for cor-
rosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose
terminal connector, or a battery near the
end of its useful service life. Consult a
trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
cian for additional information.
As needed
Wash the vehicle, including the undercar-
riage, to reduce wear that can be caused
by a buildup of dirt, and corrosion that
can be caused by salt residues.
Clean leaves and twigs from air intake
vents at the base of the windshield, and
from other places where they may collect.
Complete service information for qualified
technicians is available online for pur-
chase or subscription at www.volvote-
chinfo.com.
Emission inspection readiness
What is an Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II)?
OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized
engine management system. It stores diag-
nostic information about your vehicle's emis-
sion controls. It can light the Check Engine
light (MIL) if it detects an emission control
"fault." A "fault" is a component or system
that is not performing within an expected
range. A fault may be permanent or tempo-
rary. OBD II will store a message about any
fault.
How do states use OBD II for emission
inspections?
Many states connect a computer directly to a
vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can
then read "faults." In some states, this type of
inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission
test.
How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission
inspection?
Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspec-
tion for any of the following reasons.
If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your
vehicle may fail inspection.
If your vehicle's Check Engine light was
lit, but went out without any action on
your part, OBD II will still have a recorded
fault. Your vehicle may pass or fail,
depending on the inspection practices in
your area.
If you had recent service that required
disconnecting the battery, OBD II diag-
nostic information may be incomplete
and "not ready" for inspection. A vehicle
that is not ready may fail inspection.
How can I prepare for my next OBD II
emission inspection?
If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or
was lit but went out without service, have
your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary,
serviced by a qualified Volvo technician.
If you recently had service for a lit Check
Engine light, or if you had service that
required disconnecting the battery, a
period of driving is necessary to bring the
09 Maintenance and servicing
Maintaining your vehicle
09
218
OBD II system to "ready" for inspection.
A half-hour trip of mixed stop-and-go/
highway driving is typically needed to
allow OBD II to reach readiness. Your
Volvo retailer can provide you with more
information on planning a trip.
Maintain your vehicle in accordance with
your vehicle's maintenance schedule.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Working on your vehicle
09
219
Note the following before you begin work-
ing on your vehicle:
Battery
Ensure that the battery cables are cor-
rectly connected and tightened.
Never disconnect the battery when the
engine is running (e.g., when replacing
the battery).
Never use a fast charger to charge the
battery. The battery cables should be dis-
connected when recharging.
The battery contains acid that is both cor-
rosive and poisonous. It is important that
the battery is handled in an environmen-
tally friendly way. See page 227 for more
information on handling the battery.
Hoisting the vehicle
G027001
If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, the
two jack attachments points should be used.
They are specially reinforced to bear the
weight of the vehicle (see the illustration). A
garage jack can also be placed under the
front of the engine support frame. Take care
not to damage the splash guard under the
engine. Ensure that the jack is positioned so
that the vehicle cannot slide off it. Always use
axle stands or similar structures. The vehi-
cle's gross vehicle weight is between
5770 lbs (2630 kg) and 6080 lbs (2760 kg).
Use a jack and stands rated for this weight.
If a two-post hoist is used to lift the vehicle,
the front and rear lift arm pads should be
centered under the reinforced lift plates on
the inboard edge of the sill rail (see illustra-
tion).
WARNING
The ignition system has very high voltage!
The voltage in the ignition system is dan-
gerous!
Do not touch spark plugs, ignition cables
or the ignition coil when the engine is run-
ning or the ignition is switched on!
The ignition should be switched off when:
Conducting engine tests.
Replacing parts in the ignition system,
such as spark plugs, ignition coil, dis-
tributor, ignition cables, etc.
WARNING
Never try to repair any part of the SRS/
SIPS/WHIPS/IC systems yourself. Any
interference in the system could cause
malfunction and serious injury. Any work
should only be performed by an authorized
Volvo workshop.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Working on your vehicle
09
220
Belt check
Check the belt regularly to make sure it is in
good condition and is clean. A worn or dirty
belt can cause poor cooling and low alterna-
tor output as well as impair the operation of
the power steering and the air conditioning
unit.
NOTE
The drive belt is equipped with a self-ten-
sioning mechanism and requires no
adjustment between changes.
WARNING
The engine must not be running when this
check is performed.
Check coolant level
The cooling system must be filled with cool-
ant and not leak to operate at maximum effi-
ciency. Check the coolant level regularly. The
level should be between the MAX and MIN
marks on the expansion tank. The check
should be made with particular thoroughness
when the engine is new or when the cooling
system has been drained.
Do not remove the filler cap other than for
topping up with coolant. Frequent removal
may prevent coolant circulation between the
engine and the expansion tank during engine
warm up and cooling.
Changing coolant
Normally, the coolant does not need to be
changed. If the system must be drained, con-
sult a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
Do not top off with water only. This reduces
the rust-protective and antifreeze qualities of
the coolant and has a lower boiling point. It
can also cause damage to the cooling system
if it should freeze. Top off with Volvo Genuine
Coolant/Antifreeze only (a 50/50 mix of water
and antifreeze.
CAUTION
The cooling system must always be kept
filled to the correct level. If it is not kept
filled, there can be high local temperatures
in the engine which could result in dam-
age. Different types of antifreeze/coolant
may not be mixed.
WARNING
Never remove the expansion tank cap
while the engine is warm. Wait until the
engine cools.
If it is necessary to top off the coolant
when the engine is warm, unscrew the
expansion tank cap slowly so that the
overpressure dissipates.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Engine compartment
09
221
Washer fluid reservoir
Expansion tank-coolant
Data plate
Brake fluid reservoir
Relay/fuse box
Power steering fluid reservoir
Dipstick-engine oil
Filler cap-engine oil
Battery (under floor in rear cargo area)
WARNING
The cooling fan (located at the front of the
engine compartment, behind the radiator)
may start or continue to operate (for up to
6 minutes) after the engine has been
switched off.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Engine oil
09
222
Oil specifications
Full synthetic engine oil meeting the minimum
ACEA A5/B5 must be used. Lower quality oils
may not offer the same fuel economy, engine
performance, or engine protection.
Refer to the Warranty and Service Records
information booklet for information on oil
change intervals and oil type requirements.
NOTE
This vehicle comes from the factory with
synthetic oil.
Oil additives must not be used.
Oil viscosity
Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine life
under normal use. SAE 5W-30 will provide
good fuel economy and engine protection.
See the viscosity chart.
Viscosity chart
Extreme engine operation
SAE 0W-30 oil meeting ACEA A5/B5 require-
ments is recommended for driving in areas
with sustained low temperatures.
NOTE
Volvo uses different systems to indicate a
low oil level or pressure. Some models
have an oil pressure sensor, in which case
a warning symbol (see page 60) is used to
indicate low oil pressure. Other models
have an oil level sensor, in which case the
driver is alerted by the warning symbol in
the center of the instrument panel and a
text in the information display. Some mod-
els use both systems. Contact a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician for
more information.
Changing engine oil and oil filter
See page 290 for oil volumes. Refer to the
Warranty and Service Records Information
booklet for information on the oil change
intervals.
NOTE
Volvo does not recommend the use of oil
additives.
Checking and adding oil
G030880
Location of dipstick (1) and oil filler cap (2)
The oil level should be checked at regular
intervals, particularly during the period up to
the first scheduled maintenance service.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Engine oil
09
223
The vehicle should be parked on a level
surface when the oil is checked.
If the engine is warm, wait for at least
10-15 minutes after the engine has been
switched off before checking the oil.
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products
Checking the oil
Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a
lint-free rag.
Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and
check the oil level.
Add oil if necessary. If the level is close to
the MIN mark, add approximately
0.5 US quarts (0.5 liters) of oil.
Recheck the level and add more oil if
necessary until the level is near the MAX
mark.
Oil level should be between the MIN and
MAX marks on the dipstick.
G030881
CAUTION
Check the engine oil level regularly.
Never fill oil above the MAX mark or
let the oil level go below the MIN mark.
This could result in serious damage to
the engine.
Always add oil of the same type and
viscosity as already used.
Oil changes should be carried out by a
trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
WARNING
Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into
contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fluids
09
224
Washer fluid reservoir
G027097
Washer fluid reservoir
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment and holds approx.
6.8 US qts (6.5 liters).
When there is less than approximately 1 US
qt (1 liter) remaining in the reservoir, the
washer fluid spray will be directed to the
windshield only.
During cold weather, the reservoir should be
filled with windshield washer solvent contain-
ing antifreeze.
Changing coolant
G027087
Coolant reservoir
Normally, the coolant does not need to be
changed. If the system must be drained, con-
sult a trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
CAUTION
If necessary, top up the cooling sys-
tem with Volvo Genuine Coolant/Anti-
freeze only (a 50/50 mix of water and
antifreeze).
Different types of antifreeze/coolant
may not be mixed.
If the cooling system is drained, it
should be flushed with clean water or
premixed anti-freeze before it is refilled
with the correct mixture of water/anti-
freeze.
The cooling system must always be
kept filled to the correct level, and the
level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks. If it is not kept filled, there
can be high local temperatures in the
engine which could result in damage.
Check coolant regularly!
Do not top up with water only. This
reduces the rust-protective and anti-
freeze qualities of the coolant and has
a lower boiling point. It can also cause
damage to the cooling system if it
should freeze.
Do not use chlorinated tap water in the
vehicle's cooling system.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fluids
09
225
WARNING
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is warm. Wait
until the engine cools.
If it is necessary to top up the coolant
when the engine is warm, unscrew the
coolant reservoir cap slowly so that
the overpressure dissipates.
Brake fluid reservoir
G000000
The brake fluid should always be above the
MIN mark on the side of the reservoir. Check,
without removing the cap, that there is suffi-
cient fluid in the reservoir.
Fluid type: DOT 4 boiling point >536 °F
(>280 °C).
Replace: Every second year or 30,000 miles
(48,000 km). The fluid should be replaced
once a year or every 15,000 miles (24,000 km)
when driving under extremely hard conditions
(mountain driving, etc.).
Always entrust brake fluid changing to a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician.
WARNING
If the fluid level is below the MIN mark
in the reservoir or if a brake-related
message is shown in the information
display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the car
towed to a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician and have the brake
system inspected.
Dot 4 should never be mixed with any
other type of brake fluid.
Power steering fluid reservoir
The fluid level should always be between the
ADD and FULL marks.
Fluid type: Volvo synthetic power steering
fluid (Pentosin CHF 11S) P/N 1161529 or
equivalent.
Replace: No fluid change required.
If a problem should occur in the power steer-
ing system or if the vehicle has no electrical
current and must be towed, it is still possible
to steer the vehicle. However, keep in mind
that greater effort will be required to turn the
steering wheel.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Wiper blades
09
226
Windshield wiper blades
To change a windshield wiper blade:
1. Fold the wiper arm out from the wind-
shield and hold the wiper blade.
2. Press in the grooved catches and pull out
the wiper blade.
3. Insert a new wiper blade and ensure that
it is securely in place.
NOTE
The driver's side wiper blade is longer than
the one on the passenger's side.
Tailgate wiper blade
G026959
To change a tailgate wiper blade:
1. Pull the wiper arm rearward, away from
the tailgate window.
2. Pull out the wiper blade as shown in the
illustration.
3. Press the new wiper blade into place.
Check that it is properly secured.
NOTE
Keeping the windshield/tailgate window
and wiper blades clean helps improve visi-
bility and prolongs the service life of the
wiper blades, see page 208 for washing
instructions.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Battery
09
227
Battery maintenance
The battery in your vehicle is located under
the floor of the cargo compartment.
Driving habits and conditions, climate, the
number of starts, etc. all affect the service life
and function of the battery. In order for your
battery to perform satisfactorily, keep the fol-
lowing in mind:
Use a screw driver to open the caps or
cover and a flashlight to inspect the level.
If necessary, add distilled water. The level
should never be above the indicator.
The fluid level should be checked if the
battery has been recharged.
After inspection, be sure the cap over
each battery cell or the cover is securely
in place.
Check that the battery cables are cor-
rectly connected and properly tightened.
Never disconnect the battery when the
engine is running, or when the key is in
the ignition. This could damage the vehi-
cle's electrical system.
The battery should be disconnected from
the vehicle when a battery charger is
used directly on the battery.
To help keep the battery in good condi-
tion, the vehicle should be driven for at
least 15 minutes a week or connected to
a charger with an automatic charging
function.
If the battery is fully discharged a number
of times, this may shorten its service life.
Keeping the battery fully charged helps
prolong its service life.
The service life of a battery is affected by
factors such as driving conditions and cli-
mate. Extreme cold may also further
decrease the battery’s starting capacity.
Because the battery’s starting capacity
decreases with time, it may be necessary
to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven
for an extended period of time or if the
vehicle is usually only driven short dis-
tances.
WARNING
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!
Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds, chemicals known to the state of
California to cause cancer and reproduc-
tive harm. Wash hands after handling.
WARNING
Never expose the battery to open
flame or electric spark.
Do not smoke near the battery.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do
not allow battery fluid to contact eyes,
skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If
contact occurs, flush the affected area
immediately with water. Obtain medi-
cal help immediately if eyes are affec-
ted.
NOTE
Used batteries should be properly dis-
posed of at a recycling station or similar
facility, or taken to your Volvo retailer.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Battery
09
228
Symbols
Wear protection goggles
See owner’s manual for
details
Keep away from children
Corrosive
No smoking, no open
flames, no sparks
Explosion
Recycle properly
Replacing the battery
DRAIN PIPE
xxxx xxxxx xx xxxxx
DISCONNECT
REMOVAL OF BATTERY
O CABLE FIRST
xxxx xxxxx xxxxx
xxxx xx
+
-
WARNING
xxxx xxxxx xx xxxxx
G027076
1. Switch off the ignition.
2.
Wait at least 5 minutes after switching
off the ignition before disconnecting
the battery so that all information in the
vehicle's electrical system can be stored
in the control modules.
3. Remove the retaining bracket and
unscrew the cover over the battery. Wait
at least 5 minutes after switching off the
ignition before disconnecting the battery
so that all information in the vehicle's
electrical system can be stored in the
control modules.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Battery
09
229
4. Disconnect the negative (ground) cable
first.
5. Disconnect the positive cable and pull the
ventilation hose from the battery.
6. Lift out the old battery and put a new bat-
tery into place.
7. Connect the positive cable first.
8. Connect the negative (ground) cable.
9. Be sure that the ventilation hose is
securely connected to the battery and
that the other end of the hose is properly
routed through the ventilation opening in
the floor of the battery compartment.
G030884
Ventilation hose
10. Reinstall the cover and retaining bracket
and screw it securely in place.
NOTE
After the battery has been disconnected or
replaced, lock and unlock the vehicle with
the central locking system's remote key to
reactivate such features as the power win-
dows, moonroof, courtesy lighting, etc.
WARNING
The battery generates hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. The
battery is fitted with a ventilation hose
which vents hydrogen gas out of the
battery compartment through a venti-
lation opening in the bottom of this
compartment. If the battery must be
replaced, it is essential that the ventila-
tion hose is properly connected to the
battery and that it is routed through
the ventilation opening provided (see
illustration).
Be sure the ventilation hose is free of
debris.
Only use replacement batteries equip-
ped with a ventilation hose. Consult a
trained and qualified Volvo service
technician.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Replacing bulbs
09
230
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
When replacing bulbs, keep the following
points in mind:
Never touch the glass of bulbs with your
fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers
vaporize in the heat and will leave a
deposit on the reflector, which will dam-
age it.
The optional Active Bending Light bulbs
contain trace amounts of mercury. These
bulbs should always be disposed of by an
authorized Volvo retailer.
The following bulbs should only be replaced
by a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-
nician:
Active Bending Lights (ABL)
Daytime running lights (DRL) under the
front bumper
Turn signals and courtesy lights in the
side door mirrors
Reading lights and glove compartment
light
Courtesy (dome) lighting
Rear parking lights
Brake lights
High-mounted brake lights
If a problem occurs with the daytime running
lights (DRL) under the front bumper, the entire
lamp housing will have to be replaced.
If a problem occurs with the rear parking
lights or the brake lights, the entire taillight
housing will have to be replaced.
See page 236 for a list of bulb specifications.
Replacing high/low beams/turn
signal/parking light bulbs
WARNING
The engine should not be running
when changing bulbs.
If the engine has been running just
prior to replacing bulbs in the head-
light housing, please keep in mind that
components in the engine compart-
ment will be hot.
WARNING
Active Bending Lights* - due to the high
voltage used by these headlights, these
bulbs should only be replaced by a trained
and qualified Volvo service technician.
G027081
The entire lamp housing must be lifted out
when replacing these bulbs.
To lift out the lamp housing:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Open the hood.
3. Pull up the retaining pins (see the illustra-
tion).
4. Lift out the lamp housing.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Replacing bulbs
09
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
231
G027083
Location of the bulbs in the headlight
housing
G027082
Low/high beam (models with Active
Bending Lights)*, Low beam (models with
Halogen headlights)
High beam
1
(models with Halogen head-
lights)
Turn signal
Parking light
Side marker light
Replacing the low beam bulb (halogen
headlights)
G027088
1. Remove the plastic cover over the bulb
by turning it counterclockwise.
2. Pull the connector from the lamp housing.
3. Loosen the bulb's retaining spring by first
moving it to the right and then moving it
out of the way.
4. Pull out the bulb from the holder.
5. Insert the new bulb (without touching the
glass) in the holder.
1
This bulb has no function on models with the optional Active Bending Lights.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Replacing bulbs
09
232
6. Move the retaining spring up and push it
slightly to the left until it seats properly.
7. Press the bulb holder into place on the
headlight housing.
8. Reinstall the plastic cap. The letters
"HAUT" on the cap must be upward.
Replacing the high beam bulb
(halogen headlights)
G027085
1. Remove the rubber cover by pulling it off.
2. Pull the connector from the lamp housing.
3. Loosen the bulb's retaining spring by first
moving it to the right and then moving it
out of the way.
4. Pull out the bulb from the holder.
5. Insert the new bulb (without touching the
glass) in the holder.
6. Move the retaining spring up and push it
slightly to the left until it seats properly.
7. Press the bulb holder into place on the
headlight housing.
8. Press the rubber cover into place.
Replacing parking light/side marker
light bulbs
G028409
1. Turn the lamp holder approximately 1/4
turn counterclockwise and pull it out of
the headlight housing.
2. Pull the bulb straight out.
3. Align the guide lugs on the side of the
base of the new bulb in the grooves in the
holder and press it into place.
4. Press the lamp holder into the place in
the headlight housing and turn it approxi-
mately 1/4 turn clockwise.
Replacing the turn signal bulb
G027089
1. Turn the lamp holder approximately 1/4
turn counterclockwise and pull it out of
the headlight housing.
2. Press in the bulb slightly and pull it out of
the holder.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Replacing bulbs
09
233
3. Align the guide lugs on the side of the
base of the new bulb in the grooves in the
holder. Press it in and turn it slightly
clockwise.
4. Press the lamp holder into the place in
the headlight housing and turn it approxi-
mately 1/4 turn clockwise.
Location of taillight bulbs
Turn signal
Backup light
NOTE
If the message indicating a burned out
bulb remains in the information display
after a bulb has been replaced, consult a
trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
cian.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Replacing bulbs
09
234
Replacing bulbs in the taillight cluster
1. Switch off all lights and turn ignition key
to position 0.
2. Fold down the lower section of the tail-
gate, and fold up the rear section of the
cargo area floor. If the vehicle is equipped
with the optional grocery bag holder,
detach the holder's bands.
3. Remove the corner panel.
4. Open the cover in the side panel by pull-
ing the tab upward and toward you.
5. Loosen the bolts.
6. Pull the entire tail light housing straight
out.
7. Disconnect the wiring.
8. Place the tail light housing on a soft cloth
to help avoid scratching the lens.
9. Turn the lamp holder counterclockwise
and pull out.
10. Turn the bulb to be replaced counter-
clockwise and remove it.
11. Insert a new bulb.
12. Place the lamp holder in the groove and
turn clockwise.
13. Press wiring back into place.
14. Align the tail light housing with the holes
for the retaining bolts and press it into
place.
15. Tighten the retaining bolts.
16. Reinsert the side and corner panels.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Replacing bulbs
09
}}
235
Rear fog light
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Carefully insert a small screwdriver (see
illustration above).
3. Pry out the lamp housing.
4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
5. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and
remove it.
6. Insert a new bulb and press the lamp
housing back into place.
License plate lights
1. Turn off the lights and switch off the igni-
tion.
2. Loosen the retaining screws with a
screwdriver.
3. Loosen the bulb housing and pull it out
carefully.
4. Pull out the defective bulb and insert a
new one.
5. Reinsert the bulb housing and screw it
into place.
Front footwell lighting
G027079
The front footwell lights are located under the
dashboard on the driver's and passenger's
sides.
To replace a bulb:
1. Carefully insert a screwdriver and pry out
the lens.
2. Replace the defective bulb.
3. Reinstall the lens.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Replacing bulbs
09
236
Cargo compartment light
1. Carefully insert a screwdriver and pry out
the lens.
2. Pry out the bulb and replace it.
3. Press the lens back into place.
Vanity mirror lights
Removing the lens
1. Insert a flat screwdriver under the lens
and carefully exert upward pressure to
release the retaining lugs.
2. Snap out the lens.
3. Use needle nose pliers to pull the bulb
straight to the side. Replace the bulb. Do
not exert too much pressure on the bulb
with the pliers to help avoid damaging it.
Reinserting the lens
1. Put the lens back into position.
2. Press it into place.
Bulb specifications
Lighting function Wattage Bulb
Low beam (halogen) 55 H11 LL
High beam (halogen) 55 H7 LL
Front turn signals 21 H21W LL
09 Maintenance and servicing
Replacing bulbs
09
237
Lighting function Wattage Bulb
Front parking lights, front side marker lights, rear courtesy lighting 5 W5W LL
Turn signals in door mirrors 5 WY5W LL
Rear fog light 21 H21W LL
Backup lights 21 P21W LL
Rear turn signals 21 PY21W SV
Vanity mirror lighting 2 W2x4.6d type T5
License plate lighting 5 C5W LL
Glove compartment 5 SV8.5 (length 43 mm)
Cargo area lighting 10 SV8.5 (length 43 mm)
Front footwell lighting 5 SV8.5 (length 38 mm)
NOTE
Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts
department for the most up-to-date speci-
fications.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fuses
09
238
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Replacing fuses
G032337
Relays/fuse box in the engine compart-
ment
Fuse box in the passenger compartment,
behind the plastic cover
Fuse box in the passenger compartment,
on the edge of the dashboard
Fuse box in the cargo compartment
Fuse box in the cargo compartment
1
.
Additional fuses in cargo compartment
(XC90 Executive*)
If an electrical component fails to function, it
is possible that a fuse has blown.
The fuse boxes are located in four different
places, see the illustration above.
A label on the inside of each cover indicates
the amperage and the electrical components
that are connected to each fuse.
The easiest way to see if a fuse is blown is to
remove it. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse
is difficult to remove, you will find a special
fuse removal tool (and several extra fuses) in
the passenger compartment fuse box on the
driver's end of dashboard. From the side,
examine the curved metal wire (see the illus-
tration) to see if it is broken. If so, put in a
new fuse of the same color and amperage
(written on the fuse). Spare fuses are stored
in the fuse box in the engine compartment
and the passenger compartment. If fuses
burn out repeatedly, have the electrical sys-
tem inspected by a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician.
1
Certain markets only.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fuses
09
239
WARNING
Never use metal objects or fuses with
higher amperage than those stated on the
following pages. Doing so could seriously
damage or overload the vehicle's electrical
system.
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fuses
09
240
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Fuses in the engine compartment
G026972
When replacing fuses, be sure to replace a
blown fuse with a new one of the same color
and amperage (written on the fuse).
No A
1 ABS 30
2 ABS 30
3 Headlight washers 35
4 20
5 Auxiliary lights* 35
No A
6 Starter motor relay 35
7 Windshield wipers 25
8 Fuel pump 15
9 Transmission control module 15
10 Ignition coils, engine control
module
20
11 Throttle pedal sensor, A/C com-
pressor
10
No A
12 Engine control module, fuel
injectors, mass airflow sensor
15
13 Intake manifold actuator (6-cyl.) 10
14 Heated oxygen sensor 20
15 Crankcase ventilation, solenoid
valves, A/C connection, leakage
diagnostics, engine control
module
15
16 Driver's side low beam head-
light
20
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fuses
09
}}
241
No A
17 Passenger's side low beam
headlight
20
18
19 Engine control module feed,
engine relay
5
20 Parking lights 15
21 Vacuum pump 20
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fuses
09
242
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Fuses in the passenger compartment on the edge of the dashboard
G032316
The decal shows the positions and amperage of the fuses
Fuses are located inside the access panel on
the edge of the dashboard, on the driver's
side. There are also a number of spare fuses.
When replacing a blown fuse, be sure to
replace it with a new one of the same color
and amperage (written on the fuse).
No A
1 Blower – climate system 30
2 Audio amplifier* 30
3 Power driver's seat* 25
No A
4 Power passenger's seat* 25
5 Driver's door control module 25
6 Front passenger's door control
module
25
7
8 Radio, CD player, Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE)*
A
15
No A
9 Volvo Navigation System*, Sir-
iusXM satellite radio*
10
10 On-board diagnostics, head-
light switch, steering wheel
angle sensor, steering wheel
module
5
11 Ignition switch, SRS, engine
control module, immobilizer,
transmission control module
7.5
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fuses
09
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
243
No A
12 Ceiling lighting, upper elec-
tronic control module
10
13 Moonroof* 15
14 Bluetooth hands-free system 5
- 15 – 38 -
A
See also fuse 28 in the following section "Fuse box in the
passenger compartment, behind the plastic cover, driver's
side"
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fuses
09
244
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Fuse box in the passenger compartment, behind the plastic cover, driver's side
G028412
This fuse box is located behind the plastic
cover below the steering wheel. When replac-
ing a blown fuse, be sure to replace it with a
new one of the same color and amperage
(written on the fuse).
No A
1 Heated passenger's seat* 15
2 Heated driver's seat* 15
3 Horn 15
4
No A
5 Audio system 10
6
7
8 Alarm siren* 5
9 Brake light switch feed 5
10 Instrument panel, climate sys-
tem, power driver's seat,
Occupant Weight Sensor
10
No A
11 12-volt sockets – front and rear
seats, refrigerator* (XC90 Exec-
utive)
15
12
13
14
15 ABS, DSTC 5
16 Power steering, Active Bending
Lights*
10
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fuses
09
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
245
No A
17 Driver's side daytime running
light (DRL)
7.5
18 Passenger's side daytime run-
ning light (DRL)
7.5
19
20
21 Transmission control module 10
22 Driver's side high beam 10
23 Passenger's side high beam 10
24
25
26
27
28 Power passenger's seat*, Rear
Seat Entertainment system*
A
5
29 Fuel pump 7.5
30 Blind Spot Information System* 5
31
32
No A
33 Vacuum pump 20
34 Pump – windshield and tailgate
washers
15
35
36
A
See also fuse 8 in the previous section "Fuses in the pas-
senger compartment on the edge of the dashboard"
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fuses
09
246
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Fuses in the cargo compartment
The fuses in the cargo area are located
behind the panel on the driver's side of the
cargo compartment. When replacing a blown
fuse, be sure to replace it with a new one of
the same color and amperage (written on the
fuse).
No A
1 Backup lights 10
2 Parking lights, rear foglight,
cargo compartment lighting,
license plate lights, brake light
diodes
20
No A
3 Accessories 15
4
5 Rear Electronic module 10
6 -
7 Trailer wiring (30 feed)* 15
8 12-volt socket in cargo com-
partment
15
No A
9 Rear passenger's side door –
power window, power window
cutout function
20
10 Rear driver's side door – power
window, power window cutout
function
20
11
12
13
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fuses
09
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
247
No A
14 Rear air conditioning system* 15
15
16
17 Accessory audio 5
18
19 Tailgate window wiper 15
20 Trailer wiring (15-feed)* 20
21
22
23 All Wheel Drive (AWD) 7.5
24
25
26 Park assist* 5
27 Main fuse: trailer wiring, park
assist, All Wheel Drive
30
28 Central locking system 15
29 Driver's side trailer lighting:
parking lights, turn signal*
25
No A
30 Passenger's side trailer light-
ing: brake light, rear fog light,
turn signal*
25
31 Main fuse: fuses 37 and 38 40
32
33
34
35
36
37 Heated rear window 20
38 Heated rear window 20
09 Maintenance and servicing
Fuses
09
248
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Additional fuses in the cargo compartment (XC90 Executive*)
The fuses in the cargo area are located
behind the panel on the driver's side of the
cargo compartment. When replacing a blown
fuse, be sure to replace it with a new one of
the same color and amperage (written on the
fuse).
1. Relays for rear seat heating
and front seat massage 5 A
2. Rear seat heating, driver's side 15 A
3. Rear seat heating, passenger's
side 15 A
4. Front seat ventilation/massage 10 A
5. - -
6. - -
NOTE
Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts
department for the most up-to-date speci-
fications.
09 Maintenance and servicing
09
249
250
Audio system overview......................................................................... 252
Audio system controls.......................................................................... 253
Radio functions..................................................................................... 258
SiriusXM satellite radio...................................................................... 263
Auxiliary equipment............................................................................... 267
CD player/changer................................................................................ 270
Menu structure...................................................................................... 273
Bluetooth
®
hands-free connection....................................................... 274
A U D I O
10 Audio
Audio system overview
10
252
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
CD player
VOLUME – turn to adjust
POWER – On/Off
AM/FM – for switching between FM1,
FM2 and AM
Display
ENTER – select in the menu or activate a
selection
PHONE: press to turn standby on/off.
MY KEY – programmable key for your
favorite function from the menu
SELECTOR – select sound source
SOUND – make sound settings
EXIT/CLEAR – step back in the menu or
cancel a selection
Not in use
MENU – menu selections/navigation
CD eject
CD slot, CD changer*
search for and store the strongest radio
stations in the area in which you are driv-
ing
Station preset buttons/select a disc in the
CD changer* (1-6)
IR* Infrared port – for the optional naviga-
tion system remote control
10 Audio
Audio system controls
10
}}
253
Steering wheel keypad
G027135
The four buttons on the steering wheel key-
pad can be used to control the audio system.
The steering wheel keypad can be used to
adjust volume, shift between preset stations
and change CD tracks.
Press the
or buttons briefly to
search for a radio station, or to go to the
next/previous track on a CD.
Press and hold down these buttons to
search within a track.
Accessing and using menus
G027112
In menu mode, you can change settings and
program new functions in the audio system.
The various menu alternatives are shown in
the display, and the current level in the menu
structure is shown at the upper right corner of
the display.
Press the MENU button to enter menu mode.
Use the menus as follows:
Use the menu arrow keys (1) to navigate
up or down in the menus. Dots in the dis-
play indicate that there are more menu
selections from which to choose.
Press ENTER to confirm or cancel a
menu selection.
One long press on EXIT/CLEAR exits
menu mode.
A short press on the EXIT/CLEAR ena-
bles you to cancel, undo, or answer no to
a menu selection, or to go back in the
menu structure.
Shortcut
The menu alternatives are numbered and can
be accessed directly by pressing the respec-
tive keys on the numbered keypad on the left
side of the audio panel.
MY KEY – programming a shortcut
Use the MY KEY button to program a favorite
function from the menu, such as RANDOM,
etc.
1. Use the MENU buttons to scroll among
the functions.
2. Select the desired function from the menu
by pressing the MY KEY button for more
than two seconds.
3.
When
MY KEY STORED is shown in the
display, the function has been stored.
4. Activate the function by briefly pressing
the MY KEY button.
Repeat steps 1 – 4 to store new functions on
the MY KEY buttons.
10 Audio
Audio system controls
10
254
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
The MY KEY buttons can only be pro-
grammed for one shortcut function at a
time.
Rear headphone connectors and
controls *
G026982
The door panels behind the second row of
seats can be equipped with headphone con-
nectors for passengers in the second and
third row of seats. Several people can listen
to different sound sources, such as CDs or
the radio at the same time without disturbing
each other.
Two sets of headphones can be plugged into
each connector.
1. With the audio system switched on, use
the SEL button to select a sound source.
2. Press the arrow keys briefly to change CD
tracks or switch between preset stations.
3. Hold down the arrow keys to fast for-
ward/reverse, or search for the previous/
next strong radio station.
4. Hold down the SEL button to turn off the
sound.
NOTE
For the best sound reproduction, we rec-
ommend headphones with impedance
between 16 – 32 ohm. The sensitivity of
these should be equal to or greater than
102 dB. The headphone connections are
intended for 3.5 mm contacts and are
located under the lower edge of the
socket.
All headphones are automatically turned off
when the ignition is switched off. They must
be manually restarted when the ignition is
switched on again.
Headphones – limitations
The headphones will only work when the
ignition key is in position I or higher.
If a set of headphones is connected to
the same source that is being sent
through the speakers, the headphone
controls cannot be used to change track
or station. This is to prevent the driver
from being distracted by an unexpected
change in music.
If the driver selects the same sound
source as someone listening to this
source through headphones, the driver
takes control of the sound source.
Only one disc in the optional CD changer,
and one track on the CD can be played at
a time.
Headphone users can choose from
among the preset radio stations (AM,
FM1, FM2) previously set by the driver.
If FM is played in the speakers, AM is not
available and vice versa.
10 Audio
Audio system controls
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
255
On/Off button
G027146
To activate the system:
1. Turn the ignition key to position I.
NOTE
If you switch off the ignition while the
audio system is on, the system will be on
when the ignition is switched on again.
2. Press the POWER button (3) to switch
the audio system on or off.
Volume control
Turn the knob (2) clockwise or counterclock-
wise to raise or lower the volume. The volume
control is electronic and has no end position.
Volume can also be raised (+) or lowered ()
using the steering wheel keypad.
Pause mode
If the volume is turned off, the CD player will
go into pause mode. Re-activate the player
by turning up the volume.
Selecting a sound source
Press AM/FM (4) repeatedly to toggle
between FM1, FM2, and AM
Press the CD button (1) to change to the
CD player or optional CD changer
Turn the SELECTOR control (5) to
choose FM1, FM2, AM, CD, CD changer*,
AUX*, SiriusXM satellite radio* or BT
1
(see page 268).
The selected sound source will be shown in
the display.
Sound settings
G027147
1. Press the SOUND button (2) repeatedly
until you come to the setting that you
wish to change. Choose
BASS, TREBLE,
FADER, BALANCE, , CENTER* or
SURROUND*.
2. Use the SELECTOR control (1) to adjust
the level of the setting you have selected.
The display shows a scale from min. to
max. position. The center indicates the
normal position.
1
Bluetooth
®
streaming audio
10 Audio
Audio system controls
10
256
NOTE
Sound level for the center speaker can
only be set if Dolby Pro Logic II (
DPL II) or
three-channel stereo (3-CH) is selected in
the menu.
Setting Shown in the
display
Bass
BASS
Treble
TREBLE
Balance between
the right and left
speakers
BALANCE
Balance between
the front and rear
speakers
FADER
Center speaker level
CENTER (Premium
Sound system only)
Surround sound
level
SURROUND OFF
(Premium Sound
system only)
SURROUND MODE
Surround sound settings are used to balance
sound levels throughout the vehicle. Surround
settings for the various sound sources are
made separately.
There are three settings for surround sound.
PRO LOGIC II
3-CHANNEL
OFF (2-channel stereo)
The
symbol in the display indicates that
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II is activated.
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II functions in
CD mode only.
2-channel stereo is recommended for
AM/FM radio broadcasts.
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II is only availa-
ble on the highest level audio system –
Premium Sound.
Use the following instructions to select PRO
LOGIC II, 3-CHANNEL, or to turn these func-
tions off. See also the menu structure on
page 273.
1.
Select
AUDIO SETTINGS in the menu
and press ENTER.
2.
Select
CD SURROUND and press
ENTER.
3.
Select
PRO LOGIC II, 3-CHANNEL, or
OFF and press ENTER.
4.
The symbol
PL II is displayed when
Pro Logic II is selected.
5.
3-CH is displayed when 3-channel stereo
is selected.
6.
OFF indicates normal stereo mode.
Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
"Dolby Surround Pro Logic II", and the dou-
ble-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo-
ratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby Sur-
round Pro Logic II is manufactured under
licence from Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
Equalizer
Equalizer FR
EQ – FRONT (certain audio systems)
This function is used to fine-tune the sound
from the front speakers.
1.
Select
AUDIO SETTINGS in the menu
and press ENTER.
2.
Select
Equalizer FR and press ENTER.
10 Audio
Audio system controls
10
257
3. Use the menu selection buttons to set the
level or use the SELECTOR control.
4. Press ENTER to select the next fre-
quency. You can select five frequencies.
5. Press ENTER until you come to the menu
mode to save the changes you have
made.
Equalizer RR
EQ – REAR (certain audio systems)
This function is used to fine-tune the sound
from the rear speakers.
1.
Select
AUDIO SETTINGS in the menu
and press ENTER.
2.
Select
EQ- REAR and press ENTER.
3. Use the menu selection buttons to set the
level or use the SELECTOR control.
4. Press ENTER to select the next fre-
quency. You can select five frequencies
5. Press ENTER until you come to the menu
mode to save the changes you have
made.
Optimal sound reproduction
The audio system is calibrated for optimal
sound reproduction through the use of digital
signal processing. This calibration takes into
account the speakers, amplifier, cabin acous-
tics, the seating position of the listener, etc.,
for each combination of vehicle and audio
system. There is also dynamic calibration that
takes into account the setting of the volume
control, radio reception, and the vehicle's
speed. The sound settings described in this
manual, such as
BASS, TREBLE, and
EQUALIZER are only intended to enable the
user to adapt sound reproduction to his/her
personal preferences.
10 Audio
Radio functions
10
258
Station search
G027148
1. Choose radio mode AM/FM1/FM2 using
the SELECTOR control (3) or the AM/FM
button (1).
2.
Press briefly on
or to search
for the next strong station. The radio will
search for the next audible station and
then stop.
3. Press one of the buttons again to start a
new search.
Manually search for a known frequency
1.
Press and hold the or button
(or the corresponding buttons on the
steering wheel keypad). MAN will be
shown in the display. The radio will slowly
scroll in the desired direction and then
increase speed after a few seconds.
2. Release the button when the desired fre-
quency is displayed.
3. If you need to adjust the frequency, press
briefly on
or .
The manual search function is available for
five seconds after you last pressed the but-
ton.
Storing stations
To store a selected station under one of the
station setting buttons 0 – 9 (2):
1. Set the desired station.
2. Press the button under which the station
is to be stored and keep it depressed.
The sound will be interrupted for several
seconds and
STATION STORED is
shown in the display. The station is now
stored.
You can store up to 10 stations each for AM,
FM1 and FM2, i.e. a total of 30 stations.
Frequency ranges
Radio Frequency band
FM 87.7 – 107.9 MHz
AM 530 – 1710 kHz
Automatically storing stations –
AUTOSTORE
G027149
This function automatically searches for, and
stores up to 10 strong AM or FM stations in a
separate memory. If more than 10 stations
are found, the 10 strongest ones will be
stored. The function is especially useful in
10 Audio
Radio functions
10
}}
259
areas in which you are not acquainted with
radio stations or their frequencies.
Starting autostore
1. Choose a frequency band with the
AM/FM button.
2. Press and hold down the AUTO button
(1) until
AUTOSTORING is shown in the
display.
When
AUTOSTORING is no longer dis-
played, the autostore process is complete.
The automatically stored stations can be
selected withe the preset (number) keys If
there are no stations with sufficient signal
strength, NO AST FOUND is displayed.
Stopping autostore
Press EXIT.
Selecting an autostored station
1. Press AUTO (1) briefly. AUTO will be dis-
played.
2. Press one of the preset buttons (0 – 9).
The radio will remain in Autostore mode until
AUTO, EXIT, or AM/FM is pressed.
SCAN
This function automatically searches the cur-
rently selected waveband (AM, FM1, or FM2)
for strong stations. When the radio finds a
station, it will pause for approximately 8 sec-
onds, after which it will continue scanning.
Activating/deactivating Scan
1. Choose a waveband by pressing the
AM/FM button.
2. Press SCAN (2). SCAN will be shown in
the display.
3. Press EXIT to stop scanning.
Storing a station found by SCAN
Stations can be stored on the preset buttons
while the SCAN function is activated.
Press a preset button and hold it down
until Station stored is displayed.
This deactivates SCAN and the stored station
can be selected by pressing the preset but-
ton.
Radio text
Certain stations broadcast program informa-
tion, which can be shown in the display.
1. Press the MENU button.
2.
Select
RADIOTEXT in the menu and
press ENTER.
Select
RADIOTEXT again to deactivate.
10 Audio
Radio functions
10
260
HD Radioreception (U.S.
models only)
1
Introduction
Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radio
broadcast
HD radio is a brand name registered by the
Ibiquity digital corporation
2
. They are the
developer of a broadcasting technology
called IBOC or In Band On Channel, which
refers to the method of transmitting a digital
radio broadcast signal centered on the same
frequency as the AM or FM station's present
frequency.
The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid"
since it is both analogue and digital. During
hybrid operation, receivers still continue to
receive the analogue (non-digital) signal. HD
radio receivers incorporate both modes of
reception, where the receiver will automati-
cally switch to the analogue signal if the digi-
tal signal cannot be decoded or is lost by the
receiver. When you have tuned to an HD
Radio station, the
symbol will appear in
the audio system display.
More information about HD radio and IBOC
can be found on Ibiquity's website,
www.hdradio.com and www.ibiquity.com.
Benefits of digital broadcasting
Better sound (FM sounds near CD quality
and AM as analogue FM).
Some FM frequencies offer a greater
number of listening choices through “mul-
ticasting” (consisting of a frequency's
main channel and any sub-channels that
may also be available on that particular
frequency. See also the section "Sub-
channels" below).
When receiving a digital signal there is no
multipath disturbance or hisses/pops/
crackling due to outside influences.
How HD broadcasting works
HD Radio works similarly to conventional
radio and broadcasts of this type are availa-
ble in many areas of the United States. How-
ever, there are a few key differences:
Instead of transmitting one analogue sig-
nal, stations send out a bundled signal –
both analogue and digital.
An HD radio receiver can receive both
digital and analogue broadcasts.
Depending on the terrain and location of
the vehicle (which will influence the signal
strength), the receiver will determine
which signal to receive.
Limitations
Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM
only): The main channel is the only chan-
nel that can receive in hybrid mode (both
digital and analogue). If a frequency has
sub-channels, they are broadcast in digi-
tal mode only. The main FM channel will
be displayed as, for example, 93.9 WNYC
(Volvo uses the symbol > to indicate there
are sub-channels available) The sub-FM
1
HD Radio(TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity
Digital Corp. HD Radio(TM) is only available in vehicles not equipped with the optional integrated CD changer.
2
HD Radio (TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of
iBiquity Digital Corp.
10 Audio
Radio functions
10
261
channels will be displayed as 93.9 – 2
WNYC, 93.9 - 3 WNYC, etc.
Reception coverage area: Due to cur-
rent IBOC transmitter power limitations,
the reception coverage area in digital
mode is somewhat more limited than the
station's analogue coverage area. Please
be aware that as with any radio broadcast
technology, terrain, time of day, foliage
level and building location can have posi-
tive or negative effects on radio recep-
tion.
Analogue to digital/digital to analogue
blending: Analogue to digital blending
will occur as the signal strength reaches a
preset threshold in the receiver. This will
be noticeable in fringe areas (areas with
weak reception) and is normal.
NOTE
There may be a noticeable difference in
sound quality when a change from ana-
logue to digital or digital to analogue
occurs, such as:
Volume increase or decrease
Equalizer settings, i.e., Bass/ Mid-
range/Treble cut or boost
Time alignment (Digital program mate-
rial in extreme cases can be as much
as 8 seconds behind the analogue).
This will noticeable as a "stuttering"
effect.
The above items are dependant on the
broadcaster's equipment settings and
do not indicate a fault in the vehicle's
radio receiver or antenna systems.
Switching HD on or off
The factory setting for HD radio is on. How-
ever, when driving through areas with weak
HD signals (fringe areas), you may experience
that the radio repeatedly switches between
analogue/digital and digital/analogue recep-
tion. If this happens, it may be desirable to
switch HD off. To do so:
1. Be sure the audio system is switched on
and in AM or FM mode.
2. Press MENU in the center console con-
trol panel.
3. Press ENTER to turn HD off (the X will
disappear from the box on the display
screen).
This will disable the radio's capability to
receive digital broadcasts but it will continue
to function as a conventional (analogue)
AM/FM receiver. Please note that when HD is
switched off, it will not be possible to tune to
sub-channels (see the following section for a
more detailed explanation of sub-channels).
Repeat steps 2 and 3 above to reactivate HD
(an X will appear in the box on the display
screen).
Sub-channels
Example of an HD Radio station with sub-chan-
nels
10 Audio
Radio functions
10
262
In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FM
wavebands only) will also have sub-channels
offering additional types of programming or
music.
In such cases, a number will be displayed to
the right of the frequency number indicating
that the currently tuned frequency has at least
one sub-channel. The "2" in the illustration
indicates that you are currently listening to
the first sub-channel on frequency 93.9.
Selecting sub-channels
To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), press
the right arrow key on the center console or
on the steering wheel keypad. To go back to
the main channel, press the left arrow key. To
go to subchannel 2 (if available), press the
right arrow key.
If you are currently tuned to a frequency's
main channel, pressing the left arrow key will
tune to the next lower radio frequency.
NOTE
When the radio has gone into HD
mode, it may take several seconds
before the ">" symbol (if the current
frequency has any sub-channels) is
displayed to the right of the frequency.
Pressing the arrow keys before the
number is displayed will cause the
radio to tune to the next available radio
station, not to the current station's
sub-channels.
When you are no longer in broadcast-
ing range of the currently tuned sub-
channel,
No HD reception will be
displayed. The radio will then be
muted and it will be necessary to tune
to or search for a new radio station.
Sub-channels can also be stored as presets,
see page 258 for information on storing sta-
tions.
If you press a sub-channel's preset button, it
may take up to 6 seconds before the channel
becomes audible. If you press this button
while you are out of digital range of the trans-
mitter,
No HD reception will be displayed.
10 Audio
SiriusXM satellite radio
10
263
Listening to satellite radio
The SiriusXM satellite system consists of a
number of high elevation satellites in geosyn-
chronous orbit.
NOTE
The digital signals from the SiriusXM
satellites are line-of-sight, which
means that physical obstructions such
as bridges, tunnels, etc, may tempo-
rarily interfere with signal reception.
Avoid any obstructions, such as metal-
lic objects transported on roof racks or
in a ski box, or other antennas that
may impede signals from the Sir-
iusXM satellites.
Selecting SiriusXM radio mode
1. Press Power to switch on the audio sys-
tem (see page 252 for information on the
standard radio functions).
2. Turn the SELECTOR dial until Sirius 1 or
2 is displayed.
Activating SiriusXM radio
1. Tune to a satellite channel that has no
audio, which means that the channel is
unsubscribed and the text "
Call
888-539-SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE" is
displayed (see also "Selecting a channel"
in the right column).
2. Call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-SIRIUS
(7474).
3. When asked for the SiriusXM ID num-
ber press AUTO to display this number. It
is also possible to retrieve the SiriusXM
ID from the MENU.
4.
"
UPDATING SUBSCRIPTION" will be
displayed while the subscription is being
updated, after which the display will
return to the normal view.
SiriusXM ID
The SiriusXM ID is required when contact-
ing the SiriusXM Call Center. It is used to
activate your account and when making any
account transactions. The SiriusXM ID is
sometimes referred to as the Electronic Serial
Number (ESN).
This function displays the 12-digit Sir-
iusXMID.
Selecting a channel category
1. Select SiriusXM radio mode as descri-
bed above.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Use the up/down arrow keys to scroll
through the list of categories.
4. Press ENTER to select a category.
5.
Use the
and buttons to select
a channel in the currently chosen cate-
gory.
NOTE
The category "All" is default, which ena-
bles you to scroll through the entire list of
available satellite channels.
The channel categories are automatically
updated several times a year. This takes
approximately two minutes and will inter-
rupt normal broadcasting. A message will
be displayed while updating is in progress.
Information on channel or feature updates
is available at www.sirius.com.
Selecting a channel
There are two ways of tuning in a channel:
By pressing and holding the
and
buttons to start the scroll function.
The scrolling function begins slowly and
increases speed after approximately
5 seconds. Release the button to listen to
the currently displayed channel.
Through direct channel entry
10 Audio
SiriusXM satellite radio
10
264
Direct channel entry
The SiriusXM satellite channels are num-
bered consecutively throughout all of the cat-
egories. To access a channel directly:
1.
Press MENU and scroll to
Direct
channel entry.
2. Use the numerical keypad to enter the
channel's number. Press EXIT if neces-
sary to erase a digit.
3. Press ENTER. The radio will tune to this
channel, even if it belongs to a category
other than the currently selected one.
NOTE
The numbers of skipped or locked chan-
nels will not be displayed.
If a channel is locked, the access code
must be entered before the channel
can be selected. See "Unlocking a
channel" on page 266.
Scanning
SCAN automatically searches through the list
of satellite channels. See page 259 for more
detailed information.
Storing a channel
A total of 20 satellite channels can be stored;
10 channels each for SiriusXM 1 and 2. See
page 258 for detailed information on storing
channels.
A long press on one of the number keys
stores the currently tuned channel on that
key.
A short press on a number key while the
radio is in SiriusXM 1 or 2 mode will
tune to the preset satellite channel stored
on that button, regardless of the currently
selected channel category.
Song Seek and Song Memory
The Song Seek and Song Memory func-
tions provide both audio and visual notifica-
tion when SiriusXM is broadcasting your
favorite songs. Song Seek enables you to
store the name of the song for future advance
notification when that song is being played.
The
Song Memory feature makes it possible
to view all of the current songs that are stored
in memory.
Song memory
Up to ten songs can be saved in the system's
memory.
1. Press MENU.
2.
Scroll to "
Add song to song mem." and
follow the instructions shown in the dis-
play.
If a new song is selected when the memory is
full, you will be prompted to press ENTER to
delete the last song on the list.
The remaining songs in the list will move
down one position, and the newly added
song will be placed at the top of the list.
Song seek
When a satellite radio channel plays one of
the songs stored in the song memory, the lis-
tener will be alerted by a text message and an
audible signal.
Press ENTER to listen to the song or EXIT to
cancel.
To activate/deactivate the song seek func-
tion:
1. Press MENU
2.
Scroll to "
Song seek"
3. Press ENTER to activate or deactivate
the function.
10 Audio
SiriusXM satellite radio
10
265
NOTE
When the song has ended, the radio will
remain tuned to the channel on which the
song was played.
Radio text
The text that is displayed about the song cur-
rently playing can be changed. Use the AUTO
button to switch between Artist, Title, Com-
poser, or to switch radio text off, or use the
menu to display and select among these cat-
egories.
Advanced settings
This menu function enables you to make set-
tings on certain SiriusXM satellite radio
functions. To access this menu:
1. Press MENU.
2.
Select
Adv. settings.
WARNING
Settings should be made when the vehicle
is at a standstill.
The following settings can be made in the Sir-
iusXM menu:
Songs can be added to the song list
Channel skip settings can be made
Channel lock settings can be made
The channel access code can be dis-
played or changed
Your SiriusXM ID can be displayed
Skip options
This function is used to remove a channel
from the list of available channels.
Skip current channel
1.
Select
CHANNEL SKIP LIST and press
ENTER.
2. Select a category in the list and press
ENTER.
3. Skip channels in the list presented by
pressing ENTER.
Unskip all channels
This permanently removes all channels from
the skip list and makes them available for
selection.
Temp. unskip all ch.
This function will temporarily unskip all chan-
nels and make them available for selection.
The channels remain on the skip list and will
again be skipped the next time the ignition is
switched on.
Channel lock
Access to specific channels can be restricted
(locked). A locked channel will not provide
audio, song titles, or artist information.
NOTE
All channels are initially unlocked at deliv-
ery.
Locking a channel:
1.
Select "
Adv. settings" in the menu and
select LOCK OPTIONS and press
ENTER.
2.
Select CHANNEL LOCK LIST and press
ENTER
3.
Enter the channel access code
1
and
press ENTER.
4. Select a category in the list and press
ENTER.
5. Lock channels in the list presented by
pressing ENTER.
The channel is now locked and a checked
box will be displayed to indicate this. It will be
necessary to enter the channel access code.
See the section "Unlocking a channel" in
order to listen to a locked channel.
1
The default code is 0000. If you have changed the code and forgotten it, see the section "If you have forgotten the access code."
10 Audio
SiriusXM satellite radio
10
266
Unlocking a channel
A channel's access code
1
is required to
unlock a channel.
Unlock all channels
This permanently removes all channels from
the locked list and makes them available for
selection.
Temp. unlock all ch.
This function will temporarily unlock all chan-
nels and make them available for selection.
The channels remain on the locked list and
will again be locked the next time the ignition
is switched on.
CHANGE CODE
This function makes it possible to change the
channel access code. The default code is
0000.
To change the code:
1.
Select
CHANGE CODE and press
ENTER.
2. Enter the current code and press ENTER.
3. Enter the new code and press ENTER.
4. Confirm the new code and press ENTER.
If an incorrect code is entered, the text
"
Incorrect code!" is displayed.
If you have forgotten the access code
1.
Select "
SIRIUS ID" in the SiriusXM set-
tings menu and press ENTER.
2. Press and hold the ENTER button for
2 seconds.
The current code will be displayed.
Your Volvo retailer can also provide you with
assistance.
1
The default code is 0000. If you have changed the code and forgotten it, see the section "If you have forgotten the access code."
10 Audio
Auxiliary equipment
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
267
Auxiliary connector
AUX socket (3.5 mm)
Audio switch AUX/RSE*
If the vehicle is equipped with Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE)*, an audio switch is
located in the tunnel console for switching
from AUX and RSE. The switch has two posi-
tions:
CAUTION
The cover over the cup holders should be
open when a device is connected to the
AUX socket.
AUX: sound from an auxiliary device is
heard from the audio system's speakers
RSE: sound from the RSE system is
heard from the audio system's speakers
AUX*
The AUX (auxiliary) port can be used to con-
nect a device such as an MP3 player.
Turn the SELECTOR control (see the illustra-
tion on page 252) to choose
AUX.
If the player is being charged through a 12-
volt socket while it is connect to the AUX
port, sound quality may be impaired.
The volume of the external sound source
AUX may be different from the volume of the
internal sound sources such as the CD player
or the radio.
USB
USB connector in glove compartment
If you connect an iPod®, MP3 player or a
USB flash drive to the optional USB connec-
tor, this device can be controlled using the
vehicle's audio controls.
NOTE
Be sure that the device and/or cable are in
the glove compartment before closing the
glove compartment door.
1. Select USB with the SELECTOR button.
>
Connect device will be displayed.
10 Audio
Auxiliary equipment
10
268
2. Connect the iPod®, MP3 player or USB
flash drive to the USB connector (see the
illustration).
>
The text
Loading will be displayed
while the system loads the files (folder
structure) on the device. This may take
a short time.
When the information has been loaded, infor-
mation about the tracks on the device will be
displayed.
The
/ buttons can be used to fast
forward/reverse or change tracks:
Press briefly to change tracks.
Press slightly longer to fast forward/
reverse.
The arrow keys on the steering wheel keypad
can also be used in the same way.
NOTE
The system supports a number of
iPod
®
models produced in 2005 or
later.
In order to help avoid damage to the
USB socket, it will be switched off if
there is a short circuit or if the con-
nected device uses too much current
(which can happen if the device does
not comply with the USB standard).
The USB socket will reactivate the
next time the ignition is switched on if
the problem no longer exists. If the
problem persists, contact a trained
and authorized Volvo service techni-
cian.
USB flash drive
To simplify the use of a USB flash drive, it is
advisable to only store music files on the
drive. It will take considerably longer for the
system to index the files on the drive if it con-
tains anything other than compatible music
files.
NOTE
The system supports removable media
that uses the USB 2.0 standard and
the FAT32 file system. It can index up
to 1,000 folders and a maximum of
254 sub-folders/files for each folder.
However, the highest folder level can
support up to 1,000 sub-folders/files.
When using a longer type of USB
device, connecting it with a USB
adapter cable will help reduce
mechanical wear on the USB socket
and on the device.
iPod
®
An iPod
®
is charged and draws current if it is
connected to the USB connector. However, if
the battery is completely discharged, it
should be charged before the iPod
®
is con-
nected to the USB connector.
Bluetooth
®
streaming audio (BT)
The vehicle's audio system is equipped with
Bluetooth
®
, which makes it possible to play
streaming audio files from a Bluetooth
®
con-
nected cell phone. Navigation and control of
the phone can be done through the vehicle's
center console control panel or the steering
wheel keypad. On certain cell phones, it is
10 Audio
Auxiliary equipment
10
269
also possible to change tracks from the
phone itself.
In order to listen streaming audio, BT must be
selected as a sound source (see page 255)
and a Bluetooth
®
cell phone must be con-
nected (paired) with the audio system. See
page 275 for more information.
NOTE
Any Bluetooth cell phones used must sup-
port Audio/Video Remote Control Profile
(AVRCP) and Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile (A2DP). The phone must use
AVRCP version 1.3 and A2DP 1.2. If older
versions of these standards are used, cer-
tain features (e.g., scan or random) may
not function.
Not all cell phones are fully compatible
with the vehicle's Bluetooth system. A list
of compatible phones is available at you
Volvo retailer or at www.volvocars.us.
Listening to streaming audio
Turn SELECTOR to select BT as the sound
source.
The
/ buttons can be used to fast-
forward/back or change tracks:
Press briefly to change tracks.
Press and hold to go fast-forward/back.
The buttons in the steering wheel keypad can
be used in the same way.
Auxiliary sound level
G027150
If the external sound source's volume is too
high, the quality of the sound may be
impaired.
This can be prevented by adjusting the exter-
nal sound source's input volume.
1. While playing the radio or a CD, lower the
audio volume to about one-quarter.
2. Switch to AUX mode on the audio sys-
tem.
3. Connect the headphone output from your
music player to the AUX input using a
cable with a stereo 3.5 mm miniplug at
both ends.
4. Set your music player's headphone vol-
ume to three-quarters using the player's
volume controls.
5.
Select
AUX VOLUME in the menu and
press ENTER.
6. Adjust the volume with SELECTOR (1) or
with the up/down arrows (2) and press
ENTER.
7. If there is distortion, lower your music
player's headphone volume until the dis-
tortion goes away.
Finally, exit the menu and adjust the audio
volume to a comfortable level.
NOTE
This cannot be done with the steering
wheel keypad.
10 Audio
CD player/changer
10
270
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G027151
Playing a CD
CD player
If a CD is in the slot and the audio system is
in CD mode when it is switched on, the CD
will be played automatically. Otherwise, to
play a CD:
1. Insert a CD into the slot (2).
2. Select the CD mode using the
SELECTOR control (4) or the CD button
(1).
CD changer*
The CD changer can hold up to six discs.
If a CD position in the changer containing a
disc is selected, and the audio system is in
CD mode when it is switched on, the CD will
play automatically. Otherwise, to play a CD:
1. Select an empty position using the station
setting buttons 1 – 6.
INSERT DISC will
be displayed. Be sure this text is dis-
played before inserting a disc. The num-
bers of positions already containing discs
are shown in the display.
2. Insert a CD into the slot (2).
3. Select the CD mode using the
SELECTOR control (4) or the CD button
(1).
Ejecting CDs
CD player
Press the EJECT button (3) to eject the CD.
CD changer
Ejecting one disc
A short press on the EJECT button (3) will
eject the CD that is currently playing.
NOTE
For reasons of traffic safety, the ejected
CD must be removed within 12 seconds or
it will be automatically drawn back into the
slot and the CD player will enter pause
mode. Press the CD button to restart the
disc.
Ejecting all discs
A long press on the EJECT button (3) starts
the EJECT ALL function.
The text
EJECTING ALL will be displayed
and the entire magazine will be emptied disc
by disc.
Pause
To pause CD playback, turn the volume all
the way down. "
CD paused" will be dis-
played. This will not occur if someone in the
rear seat is listening to the CD through the
optional headphones.
Play will resume when the volume is turned
up again.
Audio files
In addition to playing normal music CDs, the
CD player/changer can also play discs con-
taining files in mp3 or wma format.
NOTE
Certain discs that are copy protected can-
not be read by the player.
When a disc with audio files is inserted in the
player, the player scans the disc's folders
before it begins playing the files. The length
of time that this takes depends on the quality
of the disc.
10 Audio
CD player/changer
10
271
Navigating the disc and playing tracks
If a disc with audio files is in the CD player,
press ENTER to display a list of folders on
the disc.
Use the up and down arrows to move among
the folders on the disc. Audio files have the
symbol and folders containing these
files have the
symbol.
Press ENTER to play a selected folder or a
file.
When the music file has been played, the
player will continue to play the rest of the files
in the current folder. When all of the files in
the folder have been played, the player will
automatically go to the next folder and play
the files in it.
NOTE
Press or if the entire name of
the current track does not fit in the display.
Changing tracks
CD player/CD changer
1.
Briefly press or to go to the
next/previous track or file. The steering
wheel keypad can be used in the same
way.
2.
Press and hold down
or to
search within a track/file. The search con-
tinues as long as the buttons are
depressed. The steering wheel keypad
can be used in the same way.
SCAN
This function plays the first ten seconds of
each track or file
1
.
1. Press SCAN to begin scanning the tracks
or files on the currently selected CD.
2. Press EXIT/CLEAR or SCAN to interrupt
the scan function and listen to an entire
track or file.
Random play
CD player
This function plays the tracks or files on a CD
in random order (shuffle).
If a normal music CD is being played
Select RANDOM in the menu and press
ENTER.
If a CD with mp3 or wma files is being
played
Select DISC or FOLDER in the menu and
press ENTER.
CD changer
This function offers two alternatives for play-
ing the tracks on the disc(s) in the CD
changer in random order (shuffle).
SINGLE DISC (random order on the cur-
rently selected disc)
ALL DISCS (random order on all of the
CDs in the changer)
If a normal music CD is being played
Select
RANDOM in the menu and press
ENTER.
Select
SINGLE DISC or ALL DISCS and
press ENTER.
NOTE
Press to play the next randomly selected
track. This can only be done on the cur-
rently selected disc.
If a CD with mp3 or wma files is being
played
Select SINGLE DISC or FOLDER In the
menu and press ENTER.
This function is deactivated when a new disc
is selected.
1
CD changer: SCAN only functions on the currently selected disc.
10 Audio
CD player/changer
10
272
Disctext
Certain CDs contain information about the
disc, such as the titles of the tracks, etc. This
information can be shown in the display by
activating the
DISCTEXT function.
1. Press the MENU button.
2.
Select
DISCTEXT in the menu and press
ENTER.
3. Any information that may be stored on
the disc will be displayed.
To deactivate this function, select
DISCTEXT
and press ENTER.
Compact disc care
Do not put tape or labels on the disc
itself. They could become stuck in the
player.
Use CD standard EN 60908 discs only.
Discs not meeting this standard may
cause problems with system (poor
sound). CDR discs can cause listening
problems due to the quality of the disc or
recording equipment used.
DualDisc: The audio side of a DualDisc
(combined CD/DVD) does not meet CD
specifications and may not play in your
audio system.
Keep the discs clean. Wipe them with a
soft, clean, lint-free cloth, working from
the center outwards. If necessary,
dampen the cloth with a neutral soap sol-
ution. Dry thoroughly before using.
Never use cleaning spray or antistatic liq-
uid. Use only cleaners specifically made
for CD's.
Use discs of the correct size only (3.5"
discs should never be used).
Volvo does not recommend the use of
plastic outer rings on the disc.
Condensation may occur on discs/optical
components of the changer in cold winter
weather. The disc can be dried with a
clean, lint-free cloth. Optical components
in the CD changer may, however, take up
to one hour to dry off.
Never attempt to play a disc which is
damaged in any way.
When not in use, the discs should be
stored in their covers. Avoid storing discs
in excessive heat, direct sunlight or dusty
locations.
10 Audio
Menu structure
10
273
FM Menu
1. Radio Text
2. Audio Settings
1
1. Surround
2. Equalizer Fr
3. Equalizer Rr
4. Reset All
AM Menu
See Audio Settings in the FM Menu.
CD Menu
1. Random
2. Disc Text
3. Audio Settings
See Audio Settings in the FM Menu.
AUX Menu (option)
1. AUX input vol
2. Audio Settings
See Audio Settings in the FM Menu.
1
Certain audio systems
10 Audio
Bluetooth
®
hands-free connection
10
274
Introduction
System overview
Cell phone
Location of the microphone
Steering wheel keypad
Center console control panel and display
Bluetooth
®
hands-free
This feature makes it possible to set up a
wireless connection between a Bluetooth
®
-
enabled cell phone and the vehicle’s audio
system. This enables the audio system to
function as a hands-free connection and
allows you to remote-control a number of the
phone’s functions. The microphone used by
this system is located in the roof lining near
the sun visor (2). The buttons and other con-
trols on the cell phone can always be used
regardless of whether or not the phone is
connected to the hands-free system.
NOTE
Not all cell phones are fully compatible
with the hands-free system. A list of com-
patible phones is available at your Volvo
retailer or at www.volvocars.us
WARNING
Never use the hands-free feature or any
other device in your vehicle in a way that
distracts you from the task of driving
safely. Distraction can lead to a serious
accident.
Overview of Bluetooth
®
controls
Center console control panel
VOLUME: the buttons on the steering
wheel keypad can be also be used.
Display
ENTER: press to answer an incoming
call, make menu selections or activate the
phone from standby mode.
PHONE: press to turn standby on/off.
EXIT: press to end a call, reject an
incoming call, go back in the menu sys-
tem, cancel a selection or to erase num-
bers/letters that have been entered.
10 Audio
Bluetooth
®
hands-free connection
10
}}
275
MENU: press to access the menu sys-
tem. Press the arrow keys to go up or
down among menu alternatives.
Search: go forward or back when enter-
ing text/numbers.
Alphanumeric keys and menu shortcuts.
Getting started
Use the controls in the center console (3) or
the buttons in the steering wheel keypad to
access, navigate and make selections in the
hands-free system’s menus (see page 278).
Activating/deactivating
A short press on the PHONE button in the
center console activates the hands-free sys-
tem. The text
PHONE will appear at the top
of the display to indicate that the audio sys-
tem is in telephone mode.
The
symbol indicates that the hands-
free system is active.
A long press on the PHONE button deacti-
vates the hands-free system and disconnects
the cell phone.
Connecting cell phones
The procedure for connecting a cell phone
varies, depending on the phone itself, and on
whether or not the phone has been previously
connected.
If this is the first time the phone is to be con-
nected to the hands-free system, proceed as
follows:
Alternative 1–using the vehicle's menus
1.
Activate the cell phone’s Bluetooth
®
func-
tion (refer to the phone’s owner’s manual
if necessary) or go to www.volvocars.com
2.
Activate the vehicle’s Bluetooth
®
hands-
free system by briefly pressing the
PHONE button.
>
Add phone will be displayed. If one or
more cell phones are already regis-
tered in the system, they will also be
displayed.
3.
Select
Add phone.
> The audio system will search for cell
phones that are in range. This search
takes approximately 30 seconds. Any
phones detected will be displayed with
their Bluetooth
®
names. The hands-
free system’s Bluetooth
®
name will
appear in the cell phone’s display as
My Volvo Car.
4. Select one of the cell phones shown in
the audio system’s (center console) dis-
play.
5. Using the cell phone’s keypad, enter the
digits shown in the audio system’s dis-
play.
Alternative 2–using the cell phone’s menus
1. Activate the hands-free system by briefly
pressing the PHONE button in the center
console. If there is a cell phone con-
nected, disconnect it from the hands-free
system.
2. Perform a search using the cell phone’s
Bluetooth
®
function (consult the cell
phone’s owner’s manual if necessary).
3.
Select
My Volvo Car in the list of devices
shown in the cell phone’s display.
4. When prompted, enter the PIN code 1234
in the cell phone.
5.
Connect to
My Volvo Car from the cell
phone.
The cell phone will be registered and will be
connected automatically to the audio system
while the text Synchronizing is displayed.
For more information on synchronizing a cell
phone, see page 277.
When a connection has been established, the
symbol and the cell phone’s Bluetooth
®
name will be displayed. The cell phone can
now be controlled from the audio system.
10 Audio
Bluetooth
®
hands-free connection
10
276
Making a call
1.
Ensure that
Phone is shown at the top of
the center console display and that the
symbol is visible (by pressing briefly
on PHONE on the center console).
2. Dial the desired phone number or use the
phone book (see page 277).
3. Press ENTER.
End the call by pressing EXIT.
Disconnecting the cell phone
The cell phone is automatically disconnected
from the audio system if it is moved out of
range. For more information about connec-
tions, see page 275.
The cell phone can be manually disconnected
from the hands-free system by pressing
PHONE. The hands-free system is also deac-
tivated when the ignition is switched off.
When the cell phone is disconnected from the
hands-free system, a call in progress can be
continued using the cell phone’s own speaker
and microphone.
NOTE
Certain cell phones may require confirma-
tion from the phone’s keypad when a call
is transferred from hands-free to the cell
phone.
Handling calls
Incoming calls
Press ENTER to answer a call, even if the
audio system is currently in e.g., CD or
FM mode.
Press EXIT to reject a call.
Automatic answer
This function means that incoming calls will
be answered automatically. Activate or deac-
tivate the function in the menu system under
PHONE MENU CALL OPTIONS Auto.
answer
.
Call settings
While a call is in progress, press MENU or
ENTER on the center console to access the
following functions:
Mute microphone: mute the audio sys-
tem’s microphone.
Transf call to cell: transfer the call from
hands-free to the cell phone.
Phone book: this feature enables you to
search for a stored telephone number.
NOTE
On certain cell phones, the connection
is broken when the mute function is
used, which is normal. If this happens,
the hands-free system will prompt you
to reconnect.
A new call cannot be initiated while
another call is in progress.
Sound settings
Call volume
Call volume can be adjusted while a call is in
progress using the buttons in the steering
wheel keypad.
Audio system volume
When PHONE is displayed, volume for the
audio system can be adjusted in the normal
way with the audio system's VOLUME con-
trol. In order to adjust volume during a phone
call, the audio system must be switched to
one of the other modes (FM, CD, etc).
Audio system sound can be automatically
muted when a phone call is received in
PHONE MENU PHONE SETTINGS
SOUNDS AND VOLUME Mute radio
and adjust the volume with the / keys
on the center console.
10 Audio
Bluetooth
®
hands-free connection
10
277
Ringing volume
Go to PHONE MENU PHONE SETTINGS
SOUNDS AND VOLUME Ring volume
and adjust the volume with the / keys
on the center console.
Ringing tones
The hands-free system’s integrated ringing
tones can be selected in
PHONE MENU
PHONE SETTINGS SOUNDS AND
VOLUME
Ring signals Ring signal 1,
etc.
NOTE
The connected cell phone’s ring tone may
not be switched off when one of the
hands-free system's ringing tones is used.
If you prefer to use the connected cell
phone’s ring tone
1
, go to
PHONE MENU
PHONE SETTINGS SOUNDS AND
VOLUME
Ring signals Use cell phone
signal
More information about registering
and connecting cell phones
A maximum of 5 cell phones can be regis-
tered in the hands-free system. Registration
only needs to be done once for each phone.
After registration, the cell phones can then be
found in the list of registered phones. Only
one cell phone can be connected to hands-
free at a time. Phones can be unregistered in
PHONE MENU BLUETOOTH Remove
phone
.
Automatic connection
When the hands-free system is active and the
most recently connected cell phone is within
range, it is detected automatically. When the
audio system searches for the most recently
connected phone, this phone’s name appears
in the display. To manually connect a different
cell phone, press EXIT.
Manual connection
To connect a phone other than the one that
was most recently connected or to switch
between cell phones that are already regis-
tered in the hands-free system:
Put the audio system in telephone mode
(
Phone) and follow the instructions in the dis-
play or change the connected cell by going
into the menu system under
PHONE MENU
BLUETOOTH Change phone Add
phone
.
Phone book
In order to use the hands-free system’s
phone book (list of contacts),
PHONE must
be displayed at the top of the center console
display and the
symbol must be visible.
The audio system stores a copy of the phone
book of each registered cell phone. The
phone book is automatically copied each time
a phone is connected. This function can be
activated in PHONE SETTINGS Sync ph
book
. Searches for contacts are only made in
the phone book of the currently connected
cell phone.
NOTE
If a particular cell phone does not support
copying of the phone book,
List is empty
will be displayed when copying has been
completed.
If the phone book contains information about
someone who is trying to call you, this infor-
mation will be shown in the display.
1
Not supported by all cell phones.
10 Audio
Bluetooth
®
hands-free connection
10
278
Searching for contacts
The easiest way to search for a contact in the
phone book is to press and hold any of the
buttons 29 in the center console (no. 8 in the
illustration on page 274). This starts a search
based on the first letter on the button that has
been pressed.
The phone book can also be accessed by
pressing the navigation buttons
/ on
the center console or by pressing
/
on the steering wheel keypad. A search can
also be made in the phone book’s search
menu in
PHONE BOOK Search:
1. Enter the first letter of the contact’s name
and press ENTER or simply press
ENTER.
2. Select the desired contact and press
ENTER to make a call to that person.
Voice mail number
The phone number to your voice mail can be
changed in the menu
CALL OPTIONS
Voice mail no.. If no number has been
stored, this menu can be accessed by a pro-
longed press on button 1. Once a phone
number has been stored, press and hold 1 to
dial this number.
Call lists
Lists of calls in a particular cell phone are
copied to the hands-free system each time
that phone is connected. These lists are then
updated while the phone is connected. Press
ENTER to show the most recently dialed
numbers. Other call lists can be found under
Call register….
NOTE
Certain cell phones display the list of the
most recently dialed numbers in reverse
order.
Entering text
Text is entered by using the number buttons
in the center console. Press a button once to
enter the first letter on the button, twice to
enter the second letter, etc. Continue to press
the button to display other characters.
Press EXIT briefly to erase a character. Press
and hold EXIT to erase all of the characters
that have been entered. Use the
/ but-
tons on the center console to navigate among
the characters.
Bluetooth
®
menus
1. CALL REGISTER
1.1. Last 10 missed calls
1.2. Last 10 received calls
1.3. Last 10 dialed calls
2. PHONE BOOK
2.1. Search
2.2. Copy to cell phone
3. BLUETOOTH
3.1. Change phone
3.1.1. Add phone
3.1.2–4.
Added phones
2
3.2. Remove phone
3.3. Connect fr. cell phone
3.4. Car Bluetooth info
4. CALL OPTIONS
4.1. Automatic answer
4.2. Voice mail number
5. PHONE SETTINGS
5.1. SOUNDS AND VOLUME
5.1.1. Ring volume
2
Max. 3 phones
10 Audio
Bluetooth
®
hands-free connection
10
279
5.1.2. Ring signals
5.1.3. Mute radio
5.2. Synchronize phone book
280
Label information.................................................................................. 282
Dimensions .......................................................................................... 284
Weights ................................................................................................ 286
Fluids..................................................................................................... 288
Suspension........................................................................................... 289
Engine oil............................................................................................... 290
Engine specifications............................................................................ 291
Electrical system................................................................................... 292
Three-way catalytic converter............................................................... 293
Overview of information and warning symbols .................................... 294
Volvo programs..................................................................................... 296
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S
11 Specifications
Label information
11
282
11 Specifications
Label information
11
283
Model plate: includes e.g., Vehicle Identi-
fication Number (VIN), codes for color and
upholstery, etc. The model plate is
located on the rear side of the B-pillar
(the pillar between the front and rear pas-
senger doors) and the rear passenger's
door must be open in order to see it.
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand-
ards (FMVSS) specifications (USA) and
Ministry of Transport (CMVSS) stand-
ards (Canada): Your Volvo is designed to
meet all applicable safety standards, as
evidenced by the certification label on the
driver's side B-pillar (the structural mem-
ber at the side of the vehicle, at the rear
of the driver's door opening). For further
information regarding these regulations,
please consult your Volvo retailer.
Tire inflation pressures: This label indi-
cates the correct inflation pressures for
the tires that were on the vehicle when it
left the factory. Canadian models have
the upper decal; U.S. models have the
lower one.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN):
The VIN plate is located on the top center
of the dashboard at the base of the wind-
shield. The VIN is also stamped on the
right hand door pillar.
Vehicle Emission Control Information:
Your Volvo is designed to meet all appli-
cable emission standards, as evidenced
by the certification label on the underside
of the hood. For further information regar-
ding these regulations, please consult
your Volvo retailer.
11 Specifications
Dimensions
11
284
Position Dimension in (mm)
A Wheelbase 112.6 (2857)
B Length 189.3 (4807)
C Load length, floor, seatback down 79.4 (2018)
D Load length, cargo area 44 (1118)
E Height 70.2 (1784)
F Load height 34.3 (872)
G Track, front 64.3 (1634)
H Track, rear 63.9 (1624)
11 Specifications
Dimensions
11
285
Position Dimension in (mm)
I Load width, floor 41.8 (1064)
J Width 76.2 (1936)
K Width incl. door mirrors (folded out) 83.1 (2112)
L Width incl. door mirrors (folded in) 76.2 (194)
11 Specifications
Weights
11
286
Category USA Canada
Gross vehicle weight
A
7-seat, 6-cyl, FWD
B
7-seat, 6-cyl, AWD
C
5925 lbs
6080 lbs
2760 kg
Capacity weight
7-seat models 1210 lbs 550 kg
Permissible axle weight, front
A
7-seat, 6-cyl, FWD
7-seat, 6-cyl, AWD
2770 lbs
2880 lbs
1310 kg
Permissible axle weight, rear
A
7-seat, 6-cyl, FWD
7-seat, 6-cyl, AWD
3170 lbs
3240 lbs
1470 kg
Curb weight
All models 4560 - 4790 lbs 2130 -2180 kg
Max. roof load
220 lbs 100 kg
Trailer weight, w/o brakes
1650 lbs 750 kg
Trailer weights, with brakes
See the table on page 164 See the table on page 164
Max. tongue weight
See the table on page 164 See the table on page 164
A
Permissible axle weight or gross vehicle weight must never be exceeded.
B
Front Wheel Drive
C
All Wheel Drive
11 Specifications
Weights
11
287
CAUTION
The maximum permissible axle loads
and/or the gross vehicle weight must not
be exceeded.
WARNING
When adding accessories, equipment, lug-
gage and other cargo to your vehicle, the
total capacity weight must not be excee-
ded.
11 Specifications
Fluids
11
288
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Specifications and capacities
Category Specification
Fuel tank
21.1 US gals. (80 liters)
Octane rating: unleaded gasoline, minimum octane requirement AKI 87, recommended rating AKI 91 or above
(See also page 138)
Transmission oil
A
TF-80SC
AW-1
7.4 US qts. (7.0 liters)
Miscellaneous
Power steering
Windshield washer reservoir
Brake fluid
Air conditioning system
Miscellaneous
1.1 US qts. (1.0 liters)
6.9 US qts. (6.5 liters)
0.63 US qts. (0.6 liters)
Front – 2.2 lb. (1 kg), Rear* 2.9 lb. (1.3 kg) R 134a (HFC134a)
Coolant
Volvo original coolant/antifreeze (Thermostat begins to open at 194 ° F (90 ° C)).
7.9 US qts. (7.5 liters)
Brake fluid
DOT 4 boiling point >536 °F (280 °C)
Power steering fluid
Volvo synthetic power steering fluid (Pentosin CHF 11S) P/N 1161529 or equivalent 1.1 US quarts (1.0 liters)
Washer fluid reservoir
Use washer fluid solvent in cold weather conditions 6.9 US quarts (6.5 liters)
Air conditioning system
Refrigerant – R134a
B
A
The transmission oil does not normally need to be changed during the service life of the vehicle. However, it may be necessary to replace the oil if the vehicle is often driven in areas of sustained
temperature extremes (hot or cold), when towing a trailer over long distances, for prolonged driving in mountainous areas, or if the vehicle is often driven short distances in temperatures under
40 °F (5 °C).
B
See page 94 for volumes
11 Specifications
Suspension
11
289
Rear suspension
Individual rear wheel suspension with longitu-
dinal support arms, double link arms and
track rods.
Front suspension
Spring strut suspension with integrated shock
absorbers and control arms linked to the sup-
port frame. Power-assisted rack and pinion
steering. Safety type steering column.
11 Specifications
Engine oil
11
290
Oil specifications
Engine oil must meet the minimum ACEA A5/
B5 . Lower quality oils may not offer the same
fuel economy, engine performance, or engine
protection.
Refer to the warranty and Service Records
information booklet for information on oil
change intervals and oil type requirements.
NOTE
This vehicle comes from the factory with
synthetic oil.
Volvo recommends Castrol.
Engine designation
Volume
A
3.2 6-cyl. B6324S5 7.18 US qts (6.8 liters)
A
Including filter replacement.
11 Specifications
Engine specifications
11
291
Engine designation B6324S5
Output
kW/rps
179/107
hp/rpm
240/6400
Torque
Nm/rps
320/53
ft. lbs./rpm
236/3200
No. of cylinders
6
Bore (mm/in.)
3.3/84
Stroke (mm/in.)
3.78/96
Cylinder displacement, liters
3.19 (194.8 cu in)
Compression ratio
10.8:1
Charge air cooler (Intercooler)
Turbocharged engines employ a turbo-com-
pressor to force air into the engine inlet mani-
fold and a charge air cooler to cool the com-
pressed inlet air. The resulting increase in air
flow raises pressure in the intake manifold
and increases engine power over that devel-
oped by the normally-aspirated engine. The
charge air cooler (which resembles a radiator)
is located between the turbo-compressor and
inlet manifold.
Fuel system
The engine is equipped with a multiport fuel
injection system.
11 Specifications
Electrical system
11
292
General information
12-volt system with voltage controlled gener-
ator. Single wire system in which the chassis
and engine block are used as conductors,
grounded on the chassis.
Battery
Battery 3.2 6-cyl.
Voltage 12 V
Cold start capacity (CCA) 520 A
Reserve capacity (RC) 100 min
Capacity (Ah) 60
If you must replace your battery, be sure to
replace it with a battery of the same cold start
capacity and reserve capacity as the original.
(See the decal on the battery).
WARNING
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!
Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds, chemicals known to the state of
California to cause cancer and reproduc-
tive harm. Wash hands after handling.
11 Specifications
Three-way catalytic converter
11
293
Three-way catalytic converter -
general information
Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain
engine malfunctions, particularly involving
the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition
systems, may cause unusually high three-
way catalytic converter temperatures. Do
not continue to operate your vehicle if
you detect engine misfire, noticeable loss
of power or other unusual operating con-
ditions, such as engine overheating or
backfiring. A properly tuned engine will
help avoid malfunctions that could dam-
age the three-way catalytic converter.
Do not park your vehicle over combusti-
ble materials, such as grass or leaves,
which can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system and cause such materials
to ignite under certain wind and weather
conditions.
Excessive starter cranking (in excess of
one minute), or an intermittently firing or
flooded engine can cause three-way cat-
alytic converter or exhaust system over-
heating.
Remember that tampering or unauthor-
ized modifications to the engine, the Elec-
tronic Control Module, or the vehicle may
be illegal and can cause three-way cata-
lytic converter or exhaust system over-
heating. This includes: altering fuel injec-
tion settings or components, altering
emission system components or location,
or removing components, and/the repea-
ted use of leaded fuel.
NOTE
Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with
three-way catalytic converters.
11 Specifications
Overview of information and warning symbols
11
294
Introduction
The symbols in the vehicle's various displays
are divided into three main categories:
Warning symbols
Indicator symbols
Information symbols
The following tables list the most common
symbols, their meaning and the pages in this
manual that provide more detailed informa-
tion.
Warning/information symbol
This symbol ( ) lights up and glows red if
the condition is related to safety and/or driva-
bility or yellow to alert the driver to e.g., fill the
washer fluid reservoir, etc. In either case, a
message will be displayed in the instrument
panel display.
Symbols in the main instrument panel
Indicator and warning symbols
Symbol Description Page
Warning 59
Malfunction indicator
light
61
Fault in the ABS sys-
tem
61
Rear fog light 60
Stability system
DSTC
61
Trailer turn signal
indicator
61
Symbol Description Page
Parking brake
applied
60
SRS airbag system 59
Oil pressure warning
light
60
Seat belt reminder 59
Generator warning
light
60
Brake failure warning
light
60
11 Specifications
Overview of information and warning symbols
11
295
Symbol Description Page
High beam indicator 58
Left turn signal 58
Right turn signal 58
Other information symbols
Symbol Description Page
Cruise control 78
Information symbols in the center
console display
Symbol Description Page
Surround sound 256
HD radio 260
Symbol Description Page
Audio files 271
CD folder 271
Bluetooth-connected
cell phone
275
Bluetooth
TM
hands-
free
275
Information symbols in the ceiling
console
Symbol Description Page
Seat belt reminder 56
Occupant weight sen-
sor
28
11 Specifications
Volvo programs
11
296
Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance
Your new Volvo comes with a four year ON
CALL roadside assistance. Additional infor-
mation, features, and benefits are described
in a separate information package in your
glove compartment.
If you require assistance, dial:
In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63-
VOLVO)
In Canada 1-800-263-0475
Technician certification
In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo
supports certification by the National Institute
for Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.).
Certified technicians have demonstrated a
high degree of competence in specific areas.
Besides passing exams, each technician
must also have worked in the field for two or
more years before a certificate is issued.
These professional technicians are best able
to analyze vehicle problems and perform the
necessary maintenance procedures to keep
your Volvo at peak operating condition.
11 Specifications
11
297
12 Index
12
298
1, 2, 3 ...
12-volt sockets.......................................... 80
A
A/C (air conditioning)........................... 98, 99
ABS.......................................................... 155
Accessory installation warning.................. 14
Airbag system............................................ 23
Air cleaner................................................ 221
Air conditioning.......................................... 94
Air distribution...................................... 96, 99
Air quality sensor....................................... 98
Air vents..................................................... 96
Alarm........................................................ 133
All Wheel Drive......................................... 153
All Wheel Drive – towing.......................... 163
Anti-lock brake system
warning light......................................... 60
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)................. 155
Ashtray..................................................... 115
Audio
system introduction............................ 252
Audio system
Bluetooth streaming audio................. 268
HD digital radio................................... 260
SiriusXM satellite radio.................... 263
AUTO (climate control)....................... 99, 100
Automatic locking retractor....................... 39
Automatic transmission........................... 149
shiftlock override.................................. 23
Autostart.......................................... 143, 145
AUX (audio system)................................. 267
Average speed........................................... 76
AWD......................................................... 153
B
Bass......................................................... 255
Battery..................................................... 219
maintenance....................................... 227
specifications...................................... 292
Battery – replacing................................... 228
Belt check................................................ 220
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)..... 171
Blower (fan).............................................. 100
Bluetooth cell phone connection............. 274
Booster cushion
accessory............................................. 48
integrated.............................................. 52
Brake fluid................................................ 225
Brake system........................................... 154
Brake pad inspection.......................... 154
Bulbs........................................................ 230
specifications...................................... 236
Bulbs, replacing....................................... 230
C
Capacities, fluids..................................... 288
Capacity weight....................................... 187
Cargo area cover..................................... 122
Cargo grid................................................ 121
Cargo net................................................. 119
Catalytic converter, three-way................. 293
CD Pause................................................. 270
Cell phone, hands-free connection......... 274
Center console buttons............................. 64
12 Index
12
299
Central locking system - remote key....... 127
Changing a wheel.................................... 200
Changing coolant.................................... 220
Charge air cooler..................................... 291
Check Engine warning light....................... 61
Child restraint anchors......................... 49, 51
Child restraints
recalls and registration......................... 40
Child restraint systems.............................. 41
Child safety................................................ 38
Child safety locks.................................... 132
Climate system.......................................... 94
refrigerant............................................. 94
Clock reset button..................................... 58
Coat hanger............................................. 117
Cold weather precautions........................ 169
Compact disc care
CD care............................................... 272
Convertible seats....................................... 45
Coolant.................................................... 224
changing............................................. 220
Courtesy light........................................... 111
Cup holder
rear seat.............................................. 116
Curb weight............................................. 187
Current fuel consumption.......................... 76
D
Daytime running lights............................... 68
Defroster
rear window and door mirrors.............. 75
rear window and mirrors..................... 100
windshield............................................. 99
Detachable trailer hitch............................ 167
Dimensions.............................................. 284
Disabling the passenger's side front air-
bag............................................................. 28
Display, instrument panel.......................... 58
Dolby Pro Logic II (DPL II)........................ 255
Door mirrors............................................... 85
defroster............................................... 75
Door mirrors, folding.................................. 64
Driver distraction warning.......................... 14
Driving conditions, difficult...................... 147
Driving economically................................ 146
Driving through water.............................. 147
E
Economical driving.................................. 146
Electrically operated moonroof.................. 87
Electrical system...................................... 292
Emergency locking retractor...................... 39
Emission inspection readiness................ 217
Engine
specifications...................................... 291
starting................................................ 143
Engine oil................................................. 222
checking............................................. 222
specifications...................................... 290
Environment............................................... 13
F
Federal Clean Air Act............................... 216
Flat tires
changing............................................. 198
repairing with tire sealing system....... 192
Floor mats
cleaning.............................................. 211
placing correctly................................. 143
Fog light............................................... 60, 69
12 Index
12
300
Folding door mirrors.................................. 64
Front airbags.................................. 24, 25, 28
Front seat
folding backrest.................................. 104
manually adjusted............................... 104
Front seats
power.................................................. 105
ventilated.............................................. 97
XC90 Executive.................................. 107
Front suspension..................................... 289
Fuel.......................................................... 138
Fuel filler cap........................................... 141
Fuel filler door
opening manually............................... 141
unlocking.............................................. 69
Fuel system.............................................. 291
Fuses....................................................... 238
G
Garage door opener
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System... 89
Gasoline................................................... 138
Geartronic – manual shifting.................... 150
Generator................................................. 292
Generator warning light............................. 60
Glove compartment................................. 116
Grocery bag holder.................................. 122
Gross vehicle weight (GVW).................... 187
H
Hand brake.............................................. 157
Hazard warning flashers............................ 75
HD digital radio........................................ 260
Headlights.................................................. 67
Active Bending Lights............. 64, 67, 230
Dual Xenon........................................... 64
Headlights, high and low beams............... 71
Heated front seats..................................... 99
High/low beams – replacing.................... 230
High beam bulb, replacing...................... 232
High beam flash......................................... 71
High beam indicator.................................. 58
Hoisting the vehicle................................. 219
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System........ 89
Home safe lighting..................................... 71
Hood, opening/closing.............................. 81
I
Ignition switch.......................................... 145
Immobilizer (start inhibitor)...................... 126
Important information.................................. 8
Indicator and warning symbols.................. 58
indicator light............................................. 60
Infant seats................................................ 43
Inflatable Curtain........................................ 34
Inflation pressure, checking..................... 181
Inflation pressure table............................ 183
Information and warning symbols, table
of.............................................................. 294
Information display.................................... 58
Inspection readiness................................ 217
Instrument overview.................................. 56
Instrument panel........................................ 58
Instrument panel lighting........................... 69
Interior lighting......................................... 111
ISOFIX/LATCH anchors............................. 49
12 Index
12
301
J
Jack......................................................... 198
Jump starting........................................... 152
K
Key (ignition switch) positions................. 145
Keylock...................................................... 11
Keys......................................................... 126
L
Label information..................................... 282
Lighting panel...................................... 67, 68
Load carriers............................................ 168
Locking steering wheel............................ 145
Locking the car........................................ 130
Locks, child safety................................... 132
Long distance trips.................................. 169
Low beam headlight.................................. 71
M
Maintenance............................................ 216
Maintenance, periodic............................. 217
Malfunction indicator light......................... 61
Mirrors
door, folding......................................... 64
power door........................................... 85
rearview, auto-dim function.................. 84
Moonroof................................................... 87
Motor oil
checking............................................. 222
MP3 player, connecting........................... 267
Multifilter with air quality sensor................ 98
O
OBD II...................................................... 217
Occupant safety........................................ 18
Oil
checking............................................. 222
Oil quality................................................. 222
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)...... 217
On Call Roadside Assistance.................. 296
Owner maintenance................................. 217
P
Paint - color code.................................... 213
Panel lighting, instrument.......................... 69
Park assist....................................... 160, 161
Parking brake........................................... 157
warning symbol.................................... 60
Parking lights............................................. 69
Passenger’s side front airbag, disabling... 28
Periodic owner-performed maintenance. 217
Permissible axle weight........................... 187
Polishing.................................................. 209
Power moonroof........................................ 87
Power seat............................................... 105
Power steering fluid................................. 225
R
Radiator................................................... 221
Radio
SiriusXM satellite radio.................... 263
12 Index
12
302
Radio functions........................................ 255
HD digital radio................................... 260
Rain sensor - windshield wipers................ 73
Rear fog light............................................. 69
Rear suspension...................................... 289
Rearview mirror with compass.................. 84
Rear window defroster.............................. 75
Recalls, child restraints.............................. 40
Recirculation.............................................. 99
REDUCE SPEED........................................ 62
Refrigerant (A/C system)............................ 94
Refrigerator (XC90 Executive).................. 118
Registering child restraints........................ 40
Remote key.............................................. 127
replacing the battery........................... 129
Reporting safety defects............................ 19
S
Safety defects, reporting........................... 19
Safety locks, child.................................... 132
Seat belt..................................................... 20
Seat belts
Automatic locking retractor/Emer-
gency locking retractor......................... 39
Seats........................................................ 104
Shiftlock............................................. 11, 143
override................................................. 23
Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags....... 32
SiriusXM satellite radio......................... 263
Snow chains............................................ 190
Snow tires................................................ 190
Spare tire................................................. 191
Spare tire – accessing............................. 198
Spare wheel, lowering............................. 198
Speedometer............................................. 58
Starting the car........................................ 143
Start inhibitor (immobilizer)...................... 126
Steering wheel lock................................. 145
Stone chips, touching up......................... 213
Storage compartments............ 114, 116, 117
Studded tires........................................... 190
Sun visor.................................................... 88
Symbols, overview................................... 294
T
Tachometer................................................ 58
Tailgate
locking/unlocking................................ 131
opening................................................. 81
Tailgate wipers......................................... 226
Technician certification............................ 296
Temperature control................................ 100
Temperature gauge................................... 58
Temporary spare tire............................... 191
Three-way catalytic converter................. 293
TIME FOR REGULAR SERVICE................. 62
Tire inflation pressure.............................. 183
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 203
Tires......................................................... 178
age...................................................... 178
changing............................................. 198
changing from summer to winter........ 179
designations....................................... 184
improving economy............................ 179
inflation............................................... 181
inflation pressure, checking................ 181
inflation pressure table....................... 183
load ratings......................................... 182
12 Index
12
303
rotation............................................... 178
Self-supporting run flat tires (SST)..... 205
spare................................................... 191
speed ratings...................................... 182
storing................................................. 180
tire sealing system.............................. 192
tread wear indicator............................ 179
Tire sealing system.................................. 192
Towing a trailer........................................ 164
Towing - cars with All Wheel Drive.......... 163
Towing the vehicle................................... 162
Trailer hitch - detachable......................... 167
Trailer towing........................................... 164
Transmission
shiftlock override.................................. 23
Transmission, automatic.......................... 149
Tread wear indicator................................ 179
Treble....................................................... 255
Trip computer............................................ 76
Trip odometer............................................ 58
Turn signals............................................... 71
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading................... 189
Unlocking fuel filler door............................ 69
Unlocking the car..................................... 130
Unpaved roads, driving on...................... 147
V
Vanity mirror............................................ 112
Vehicle dimensions.................................. 284
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)......... 283
Vehicle loading........................................ 187
Vehicle maintenance................................ 216
Vehicle weights........................................ 286
Ventilated seats......................................... 97
Volvo and the environment........................ 13
Volvo maintenance.................................. 216
Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance........ 296
W
Warning symbol......................................... 58
Warning symbol in center of dashboard.... 58
Warranties................................................ 216
Washer fluid reservoir...................... 221, 224
Washing the vehicle................................. 208
Water, driving through............................. 147
Waxing..................................................... 209
Weights.................................................... 286
Wheels..................................................... 178
storing................................................. 180
Windshield
IR coating............................................. 74
Windshield washer fluid reservoir............ 224
Windshield wipers.................................... 226
Winter/Wet driving mode......................... 169
Wipers...................................................... 226
W – Winter............................................... 150
12 Index
12
304
Volvo Car Corporation TP 16034 (USA & Canada), AT 1320, Printed in Sweden, Göteborg 2013, Copyright © 2000-2013 Volvo Car Corporation
7

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Volvo XC90 - 2014 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Volvo XC90 - 2014 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 13,96 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Volvo XC90 - 2014

Volvo XC90 - 2014 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 330 pagina's

Volvo XC90 - 2014 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 334 pagina's

Volvo XC90 - 2014 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Français - 334 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info